WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................52
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................76
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................133
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................152
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................193
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................221
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................269
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................275
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................283
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 13
Key Fob .............................................................13
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 16
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 18
How To Use Remote Start................................18
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................19
Remote Start Defrost Mode Activation —
If Equipped........................................................19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................19
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 20
To Arm The System ..........................................20
To Disarm The System .....................................20
Rearming Of The System .................................20
Security System Manual Override...................21
DOORS ....................................................................21
Power Door Locks ...........................................21
Auto Unlock Doors............................................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........22
Automatic Door Locks......................................23
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................23
Telescoping Steering Column..........................23
SEATS ......................................................................23
Manual Adjustments........................................24
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................26
Fold Down Tray — If Equipped .........................27
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped.................27
Head Restraints ..............................................28
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................29
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................29
Basic Voice Commands ...................................29
Get Started .......................................................29
Additional Information .....................................30
MIRRORS ...............................................................30
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................30
Outside Mirrors ................................................31
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped.....................31
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................32
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped........................................................32
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..........................33
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 33
Multifunction Lever .........................................33
Headlights ........................................................33
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ......................................................33
High/Low Beam Switch ..................................34
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .......................................................34
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................34
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............34
Parking Lights ..................................................34
Headlight Delay ................................................34
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................35
Turn Signals......................................................35
Lane Change Assist..........................................35
Battery Saver....................................................35
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 36
Courtesy Lights.................................................36
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ......................38
WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................................... 38
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................39
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped................39
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 40
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................40
Additional Rear Climate Control —
If Equipped .......................................................43
Operating Tips ..................................................43
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 44
Storage..............................................................44
USB Control — If Equipped ..............................45
Power Outlets ...................................................46
Power Inverter — If Equipped...........................47
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped .....................47
Wireless Charging Pad —
If Equipped .......................................................48
WINDOWS ............................................................. 49
Power Windows ...............................................49
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped...................49
Wind Buffeting .................................................50
HOOD....................................................................... 50
Opening.............................................................50
Closing...............................................................51
CARGO AREA FEATURES ...................................... 51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........... 52
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions......................................................53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 54
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................55
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 56
Location And Controls......................................56
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ....................57
Main Menu........................................................57
Settings .............................................................59
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ....................65
Red Warning Lights..........................................65
Yellow Warning Lights......................................68
Yellow Indicator Lights.....................................72
Green Indicator Lights .....................................72
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................73
White Indicator Lights ......................................73
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........74
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................74
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.............................................................74
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................76
Automatic Transmission ..................................76
Normal Starting ................................................76
Tip Start Feature .............................................76
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...............................76
Extended Park Starting....................................76
If Engine Fails To Start.....................................77
After Starting ....................................................77
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...........77
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ..........78
PARKING BRAKE....................................................78
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ................................78
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................. 81
Ignition Park Interlock (Keyless Vehicle) ........81
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .............................................................81
9-Speed Automatic Transmission...................82
POWER STEERING ................................................ 85
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED ............ 86
Activation ..........................................................86
Exceeding The Set Speed................................86
Deactivation .....................................................86
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 87
Activation ..........................................................87
Exceeding The Set Speed................................87
Deactivation .....................................................87
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ... 87
Cruise Control ..................................................88
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).........................89
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 98
Activation/Deactivation ...................................98
Traffic Sign Assist Modes ................................98
Indications On The Display..............................99
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................100
Operation....................................................... 100
Turning Active Driving Assist
On Or Off ........................................................ 101
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
Indications On The Display ........................... 102
Minimum Risk Maneuver.............................. 103
System Status................................................ 103
System Operation/Limitations ..................... 103
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................104
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 105
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 105
ParkSense Display ........................................ 105
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 108
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 108
ParkSense Park Assist Failure Indications .. 108
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 108
ParkSense Park Assist System Usage
Precautions.................................................... 109
Side Distance Warning System ................... 110
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................112
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 112
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation .................................... 113
Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 116
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................116
LaneSense Operation ................................... 116
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 117
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 117
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 119
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............119
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 120
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 122
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................... 123
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 123
Vehicle Certification Label............................ 123
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 123
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............... 123
Tire Size ......................................................... 123
Rim Size ......................................................... 124
Inflation Pressure.......................................... 124
Curb Weight ................................................... 124
Overloading.................................................... 124
Loading ......................................................... 124
TRAILER TOWING................................................ 124
Common Towing Definitions......................... 124
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 126
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ............................................ 126
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 127
Towing Requirements .................................. 127
Towing Tips ................................................... 130
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) .................................................... 130
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 130
Recreational Towing...................................... 131
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 131
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 131
Driving Through Water ................................. 131
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................133
CYBERSECURITY .................................................133
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................134
Customer Programmable Features ............. 134
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......151
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 151
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................152
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...................... 152
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 153
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................157
To Activate/Deactivate ................................. 157
System Operation.......................................... 157
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................158
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 158
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................... 164
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) .............................................. 168
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...................170
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 170
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 170
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 171
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 178
Child Restraints............................................. 185
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................189
Transporting Passengers.............................. 189
Transporting Pets ......................................... 190
Connected Vehicles....................................... 190
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ........................................................... 190
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 191
Exhaust Gas................................................... 192
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................193
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM .................................193
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING..........................196
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 197
Jack And Tools Location................................ 197
Spare Tire Removal....................................... 198
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 200
Wheel Covers................................................. 203
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .....................203
Alternate Tire Service Kit —
If Equipped..................................................... 209
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation ....................................................... 209
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions.............. 210
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .............. 211
JUMP STARTING.................................................. 214
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 214
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 215
Battery Location ............................................ 216
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 216
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............................. 217
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 218
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 219
Automatic Transmission ............................... 220
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................... 220
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................... 221
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 222
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.................................... 225
3.6L Engine .................................................. 225
Checking Oil Level......................................... 226
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 226
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 227
Pressure Washing ......................................... 227
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 227
Engine Oil....................................................... 228
Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 228
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 228
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 229
Body Lubrication ........................................... 231
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 231
Exhaust System ............................................ 232
Cooling System.............................................. 233
Brake System ............................................... 235
Automatic Transmission ............................... 236
Fuses.............................................................. 236
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 244
TIRES ....................................................................249
Tire Safety Information ................................ 249
Tires — General Information......................... 256
Tire Types....................................................... 259
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 260
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 262
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 263
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 264
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................264
Treadwear...................................................... 264
Traction Grades............................................. 264
Temperature Grades..................................... 265
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................265
BODYWORK..........................................................265
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 265
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 266
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 266
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
INTERIORS ...........................................................266
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 266
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 267
Leather Surfaces........................................... 268
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 268
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........269
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................269
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..269
Torque Specifications ................................... 269
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................270
3.6L Engine.................................................... 270
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 271
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 271
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 271
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 271
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 271
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 272
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 272
FLUID CAPACITIES...............................................273
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..................273
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................274
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................... 275
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 275
Prepare A List ................................................ 275
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 275
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 275
Roadside Assistance..................................... 275
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 277
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 277
Mexico............................................................ 277
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 277
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 277
Service Contract ........................................... 277
Change Of Ownership Or Address................ 278
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................278
MOPAR® PARTS ................................................278
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................278
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 278
In Canada ...................................................... 279
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................279
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS..........279
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................280
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer
case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained
in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
1
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. For any
additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer to the
Body Builder’s Guide at
https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html
.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or
death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could
result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 65.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 68
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 65
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 66
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 66
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light
Ú page 67
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 67
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 68
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 67
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 66
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 68
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 68
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 67
Generic Warning Light
Ú page 67
Red Warning Lights
1
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 68
Rear Cargo Door Warning Light
Ú page 68
Swivel Seat (Driver or Passenger) Unlocked Warning Light
Ú page 68
Yellow Warning Lights
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Warning Light
Ú page 69
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault Warning Light
Ú page 69
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 70
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
Ú page 69
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 69
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 69
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 68
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 70
Service Required/Call For Service Warning Light
Ú page 70
Speed Limiter Fail Warning Light
Ú page 70
Swivel Seat (Driver or Passenger) Fail Warning Light
Ú page 70
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 71
Yellow Warning Lights
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
Ú page 71
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 68
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 70
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 69
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 72
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Keyless System Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
Rain Sensor Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Exterior Lights Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Fuel Cutoff Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
Ú page 73
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Cruise Control Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Active Speed Limiter Set Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 73
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock all doors, as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which
can be used by pushing the emergency key release
button.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 48.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Figure 1 - Keyless Ignition Key Fob
Figure 2 - Keyless Ignition Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster
display, which will display directions to follow
Ú page 280.
1 — Front Doors Unlock
2 — Cargo Unlock Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
6 — Panic
1 — All Doors Unlock
2 — Emergency Key
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
5 — Panic
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
To lock all of the doors, push and release the lock
button once. Push and release the front unlock
button on key fob once to unlock only the front doors
(figure 1) or push and release the unlock button on
key fob once to unlock all doors (figure 2). Push and
release the cargo unlock button on key fob once to
unlock the cargo area (rear lateral sliding doors and
rear door). The doors can also be locked and
unlocked manually by using the mechanical key.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp (if equipped
and activated through the Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 134). If a door is open when the lock button
is pushed, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate to indicate that a door is still open.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside
the vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is
in the ON/RUN or START position, the message
“Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key
Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of
the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the
key fob and pulling the emergency key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a
new emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 280.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment within
the area of the front driver and passenger seats.
The START/STOP ignition button has three
operating modes: OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method
can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the mechanical key) of the key
fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push
to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system
from starting the vehicle.
For more information on normal engine starting,
see Ú page 76.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message “Vehicle ON” will display
in the cluster.
The ignition will automatically switch to the OFF
position if the following vehicle conditions last
for 30 minutes: ignition placed in ON/RUN posi-
tion, gear is in PARK and engine is off.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 280.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will not start.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window is disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Rear cargo doors closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls
will resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the
instrument cluster display until you push the
START/STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START DEFROST MODE
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate rear defrost for
15 minutes or less. The timing is dependent on
the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires,
the system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C)
or above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 40.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Rear Cargo Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Too Cold
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Canceled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.
When the Vehicle Security system is activated,
interior switches for door locks are disabled.
The system provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the horn will
sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For an
additional 15 minutes, only the turn signal lights
will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. If any doors are open, close them.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
Vehicle Security Light (on the lock/unlock button
on the instrument panel) will begin to flash every
three seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If a door or the hood is not properly closed, the
system will not be armed.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Push the Passive Entry button next to the door
handle to unlock the door Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If the system has not been disabled, the
Vehicle Security system will rearm itself after
the 15 additional minutes of the turn signals
flashing. If the condition which initiated the alarm is
still present, the system will ignore that condition
and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power lock/unlock button has an LED that
indicates whether the doors are locked or
unlocked.
Push the lock button on the instrument panel.
The indicator light will illuminate to show the doors
are locked.
Push the lock button on the instrument panel a
second time to unlock the doors.
Lock Button On Instrument Panel
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the detent.
The load compartment power door lock switch is
located on the driver door trim panel. Use this
switch to lock or unlock the load compartment
doors.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
The load compartment lock/unlock button has an
LED that indicates whether the rear doors are
locked or unlocked.
LED ON:
Doors locked. Push the left side of the
central lock/unlock button once again to centrally
unlock all doors. The LED will switch off.
LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the right side of
the central lock/unlock button again to centrally
lock all doors. The doors will be locked only if all
the doors are properly closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob,
it will no longer be possible to unlock them by
pushing the central lock/unlock button.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and
lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO UNLOCK DOORS
This feature unlocks all front doors when one front
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the rear or side door is open, only the rear or side
door is unlocked.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 134, this feature will unlock all the doors
when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 134.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signals.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver, Passenger or Rear
Door
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, push the Passive Entry
button next to the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Unlock the front doors only if the Uconnect
setting is set to "Approach" and you press the
button located next to the front handle.
Unlock the load compartment doors only if the
Uconnect setting is set to "Approach" and you
press the button located next to the rear handle.
The Passive Entry feature will be disabled if the
Uconnect setting is set to "Off".
NOTE:
Either the load compartment and cabin
compartment or all doors will unlock when
you press Passive Entry button, depending on
the selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 134.
Driving with the rear doors open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the rear doors closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the rear doors
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control blower control is set to a high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock all of the doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
When the key fob battery is low, the instru-
ment cluster will display a message indi-
cating that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 280.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 134.
STEERING WHEEL
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control
handle up. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle down until fully
engaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward/rearward and reclined. Front and
rear height and lumbar can also be adjusted
(if equipped).
Seat Adjustment (Without Swivel Seat)
Seat Adjustment (With Swivel Seat)
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
seat is in the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Without Swivel Seat
The height adjustment levers are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the
front lever to adjust the front of the seat, or lift up
on the rear lever to adjust the rear of the seat.
To raise the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while none or minimal weight
is applied to the seat.
To lower the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while seated or applying
weight to the seat.
With Swivel Seat
The height adjustment knobs are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front
knob to adjust the front of the seat up or down.
Rotate the rear knob to adjust the rear of the seat
up or down.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Front Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
3 — Rear Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
4 — Recliner Knob
5 — Lumbar Knob (If Equipped)
1 — Lumbar Knob
2 — Recline Lever
3 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
4 — Front Height Adjustment Knob
5 — Rear Height Adjustment Knob
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
Recliner Adjustment
Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seatback, lean back and rotate
the knob rearward to position the seatback as desired.
To return the seatback to its normal upright position,
lean forward and rotate the knob forward until the
seatback is in the upright position.
With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front outboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lean forward
slightly, pull the lever outward, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback
to its normal upright position, lean forward and pull the
lever outward. Release the lever once the seatback is
in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of
the driver's seatback. Rotate the control forward to
increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Suspension Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring
system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure
maximum comfort and safety. The system of
springs also effectively absorbs impact from
uneven road surfaces.
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob, located on the
inboard side of the seat, to set the required setting
based on body weight, with settings between 88 lb
(40 kg) and 286 lb (130 kg).
Weight Adjustment Knob
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision, you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front
inboard side of the seat. The seat may be turned
through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side
and approximately 35° toward the door. The seat
may be locked in the driving position or at the
180° position. To swivel the seat, pull the swivel
seat inboard lever outward, turn the seat to the
desired position and release the lever.
Swivel Seat Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel
seats, the seats must be locked in the facing
forward position while driving. If the seats are not
in the correct position, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked
in the facing forward position before the first
vehicle movement, shifting out of park is not
allowed until the seats are both locked in the
facing forward position. When the seats are not in
the right position and the first vehicle movement
after ignition START is attempted, a chime and a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Rotate and lock the swivel seats in the
correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked
in the facing forward position during movement
of the vehicle, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and an intermittent
chime will sound until key-off or until the swivel
seats are locked in the facing forward position.
Stop and move the swivel seats in the correct
position before proceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not
possible to check the correct position of the swivel
seats, a message and the generic warning light
appears in the instrument cluster display to inform
about the failure. In these conditions, check the
status of the swivel seats and do not drive the
vehicle until the swivel seats are locked in the
facing forward position.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front driver and
passenger seats may be equipped with
heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front
heated seats are located on the lower outboard
side of the seat.
Heated Seat Switch
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.
Push the switch a second time to shut the heating
elements off.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
FOLD DOWN TRAY — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the
seat is equipped with a fold-down tray that can be
used as a document support surface. To use the
fold-down tray, grab the pull tab and lower the tray.
Lowering The Fold-Down Tray
The fold-down tray is equipped with two cup holders
and a support surface with a paper holder clip.
Closing The Fold-Down Tray
ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS — IF EQUIPPED
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and
adjusted for height. Underneath the front of the
armrest is the adjuster wheel which will adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust
the height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post and put the
head restraint posts into the holes. Then, adjust it
to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the preceding reinstallation instruc-
tions prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
NOTE:
Voice Recognition is only available on the
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following can be given at any point while using
your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button and after the beep, say a
command. You can also say the system “Wake Up”
word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”, and then say
a command. The factory default Wake Up word is
set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use
the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice
recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be set
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 134.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. Also, you can say the vehicle
“Wake Up” word to issue a Voice Command.
The available “Wake Up” words are “Hey Uconnect”
and “Hey Ram”.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer a Phone Call
2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A
Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation:
Push The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming
Phone Call
3 — Push To End A Phone Call
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 280.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
road behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control to
access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective when
driving in the following conditions:
Nighttime in low light applications
Bad weather conditions (e.g. extreme haze,
snow/slush)
If it becomes difficult to see clearly in the display,
the camera may need to be cleaned. If snow, ice,
mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Camera Location
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be folded
forward or rearward to avoid damage. The hinges
have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL
A
ND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn
signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs,
which are located in the upper outer corner of each
mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the
key fob or open any door. This LED shines outward
to illuminate the front and rear door handles.
It also shines downward to illuminate the area in
front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver’s side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left
upper, left lower, right upper or right lower mirror
positions indicated by one of the four arrows on the
switch. Tilt the control knob in the direction you want
the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the
mirror, turn the control to the center O (off) position to
prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with additional
spotter mirrors, you can adjust them when the
control knob is positioned to the lower arrows.
The vehicle must be in ON/RUN to adjust the
mirrors.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located on
the driver’s door panel below the power mirror controls.
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will fold in,
push the switch to the left and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
The power folding mirrors are designed to be
folded and unfolded using the power folding
switch. If the mirrors are manually folded, the
mirror head may appear loose.
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount
of play, the mirror should be power folded closed,
then power folded open (this may require multiple
button pushes).
NOTE:
The intended use of the power folding mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors.
Only manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by
accidental impact. In this case it is possible to
restore to position both ways, manually and
electrically (as previously described).
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 40.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
taillights, license plate light, clearance lights
and instrument panel lights are also turned on.
To turn off the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, the rear parking lights,
clearance lights, and Daytime Running Lights
(DRLs) will turn on when the headlight switch is
rotated to the O (off) position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on
when the ignition is in the ON position and the
vehicle is in DRIVE or NEUTRAL.
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the O (off) position or the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRLs.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
CAUTION!
Leaving the mirror in a non-powered position,
accidental impact or manual fold, may cause
permanent damage to the mirror. Electrically
restore the mirror to its normal position, as soon
as practical.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever toward the instrument panel to turn on the high
beams. The High Beam Indicator Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicated that the high beams
are on. Push the multifunction lever a second time to
switch the headlights back to low beam. When the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, both the high and
low beams will turn off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the windshield.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order for the Automatic High
Beam Headlamp Control to activate.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 134.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically
turns the headlights on or off based on ambient
light levels.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To turn on the automatic headlights, turn the end
of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. To
turn off the automatic headlights, turn the end of
the multifunction lever back to the O (off) position.
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can be turned on, with the ignition
in the OFF position, by moving the end of the
multifunction lever to O (off) position and then to
the headlight position.
The indicator light in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time after the engine is turned off.
Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, rotate the multifunction lever to the O (off)
position within two minutes. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned from
O (off) to the low beam position. If the headlight
switch is in AUTO position and headlights were on
before the ignition is OFF, the delay interval begins
automatically.
Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the
headlights, the parking lights or by placing the
ignition in the RUN position. If you shut off the
lights before the ignition is turned on, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Headlights with ignition in the OFF position.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the headlights
can be switched on for a maximum time of
8 minutes. To turn on the headlights with the
ignition in the OFF position, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
NOTE:
If the headlight delay function is disabled in the
Uconnect Setting, when you put the ignition in the
OFF position with the multifunction lever already
set in the headlight position, the headlights remain
on for 8 minutes.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog light switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering column.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
fog light button. To turn off the front fog lights,
push the fog light button a second time or turn
off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights
are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog lights
will also turn off.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system
Ú
page 134.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear
turn signals.
NOTE:
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a
turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp
will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the
turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp
will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, when
the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
These lights are mounted between the sun visors
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by
pushing the corresponding switch.
Courtesy Lights
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (off/left position, center position,
on/right position). Using the switch on the bottom
of the overhead console:
Push the switch to the on/right position from its
center position and the lights are always on.
Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console control the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch on the right
to turn the right light on; push again to turn off.
Push the switch on the left to turn the left light on;
push again to turn off.
Rear Lights
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Cargo
Lamp located at the upper rear cargo area above
the rear doors.
Rear Cargo Lamp Location
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a Side
Cargo Lamp located at the upper rear area of the
passenger side sliding door opening.
1 — Ambient Light
2 — Left Map Light
3 — Off/Left Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Right Map Light
6 — On/Right Position
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights
are off to avoid draining the battery.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Side Cargo Lamp Location
The Rear and Side Cargo Lamps can be set to three
different positions by pushing the lens to the right,
left, or center positions.
Push the lens to the right from its center posi-
tion and the lamp is always off.
Leave the lens in the center position, and the
lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed.
Push the lens to the left from its center position
and the lamp is always on.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a cargo
lamp on the center of the ceiling of the cargo area.
Ceiling Cargo Lamp
The Ceiling Cargo Lamp can be set to three
different positions (off position, center position,
and on position).
Push the switch to the off position from its
center position and the light is always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
light is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed. The Ceiling
Cargo Lamp is also equipped with a movement
sensor that will switch the light on when move-
ment is detected.
Push the switch to the on position from its
center position and the light is always on.
NOTE:
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the light will
stay on for about 15 minutes and then time out.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of
the instrument panel below the instrument cluster
display.
Dimmer Controls
Pushing the “+” or “–” button will increase or
decrease the brightness of the instrument panel
lights, cupholder lights, and footwell lights, as long
as the headlights or parking lights are on.
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be
dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the
Uconnect system, the brightness will automatically
adjust from daytime intensity to nighttime intensity
(and vice versa) based on ambient light levels
outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen
cannot be adjusted when the dimmer control is
at the maximum setting (interior lights on), even
when Display Mode is set to Auto within the
Uconnect Settings.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the
brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust
to the set brightness (1 - 6) when the headlights
are either on or off. For more information on these
Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 134.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the
dome lamp. The ambient light will be on all the
time, with the option of dimming it with the dimmer
controls as long as the headlights are turned on.
Ambient LED Lighting — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with LED lighting
in the front footwells and center cup holders.
The brightness of the lights can be adjusted using
the dimmer controls, located on the left side of the
instrument panel, as long as the headlights are
turned on.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
They also turn on when unlocking or opening
manually from the driver door cylinder.
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is changed to the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the front doors is opened, the front
dome light will illuminate for approximately
three minutes.
When one of the rear doors is opened, the rear
dome light will illuminate for approximately
three minutes.
When the front doors are closed, the front dome
light will automatically shut off after approxi-
mately 27 seconds.
When the rear doors are closed, the rear dome
light will automatically shut off after approxi-
mately 27 seconds. The timing stops once the
ignition is placed in the RUN or ON position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the
following conditions:
The dome light is disabled when the ignition is
placed in the RUN or ON position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically when
the doors are locked.
NOTE:
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the switch on
the overhead console is in the on position.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the switch on the overhead console is in the OFF
position.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. There are
five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever
can be raised or lowered to access the modes.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the first
two detent positions for intermittent settings, the
third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth
for high wiper operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
lever toward the steering wheel to activate. The wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for three cycles and then turn off.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The washer function must be used
in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 231.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of two detent positions
for intermittent settings to activate this feature.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper lever is rotated from the
O (off) position to the first intermittent setting or
from the first intermittent setting to the second
intermittent setting, the wipers will perform an
immediate wipe cycle to clean the windshield.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the windshield wiper lever. Wiper delay position
one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position
two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in
the O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 134.
1 — Pull Back For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Intermittent Settings
3 — Push Upward For Mist
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature
— When the ignition is
first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater
than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with a Remote Start system,
Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in
three ways:
Moving the lever from the O (off) position to the
intermittent positions.
One Mist command actuation.
The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and
the rain sensor detects the presence of rain.
NOTE:
In the event of a rain sensor failure, a dedicated
telltale on the instrument cluster will appear to
warn the customer (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen and on the instrument
panel below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display With Manual
Climate Controls
Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display With Manual Climate
Controls
MAX A/C Button — If Equipped
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button — If Equipped
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system could remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
is disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode
causes the LED in the control button to blink and
then turns off.
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Max defrost set maximum temperature
setting for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the
Climate Control system will return to the previous
setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets.
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 10 minutes the first time it is activated after
the first key cycle. If the key cycle is engaged again,
the rear window defroster will automatically turn
off 5 minutes after it is activated.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you press
the red arrow button on the faceplate.
The temperature decreases as you press
the blue arrow button on the faceplate.
You can also adjust the temperature using the
sliding temperature bar on the touchscreen.
Slide the bar upward into the red to increase the
temperature, and slide it downward into the blue to
decrease the temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speed increases as you press
the up arrow above the blower control symbol.
The blower speed decreases as you press the
down arrow below the blower control symbol.
You can also adjust the blower speed on the
touchscreen by selecting a speed on the blower bar.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or the faceplate,
to change the airflow distribution mode.
Pushing this button will cycle through the five
mode combinations in order: Face, Face/Feet, Feet,
Windshield/Feet, Windshield. The cycle will repeat if
the button is continually pushed.
NOTE:
The distribution modes on the climate control
screen will also illuminate when a selection is
made using the button on the instrument panel.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vents out of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
Move the vent to the furthermost sides to close
the vent.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the Climate Control system
will return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets.
This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL —
I
F EQUIPPED
These switches, mounted on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column, activate the
additional rear heating/air conditioning system.
NOTE:
These switches must be enabled for operation by
the Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Controls Switches
Rear Blower Control
Push this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. An indicator light will turn on when
the rear climate control is on.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect against
engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 265.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Box Compartments
The glove box compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Box Compartments
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Dash Storage
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped
A storage tray is located under the driver’s seat.
To remove the tray, lift up on the tray to withdraw it
from the hooks on the support base, then slide the
tray out from under the seat.
Underseat Storage Tray
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior
Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn (A/C)
on to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Glove Box Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Box Compartment
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
USB CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB ports are located on the instrument panel to
the right of the radio. This feature allows an external
USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at
a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed as follows when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
AUX Jack And USB Ports
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and
album information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track infor-
mation may not be present on the radio display.
The device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to play, and browse the contents of the
device.
The audio device battery charges when plugged
into the USB port.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to
connect an external USB device to the vehicle's
USB charging port.
NOTE:
If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
1 — Media USB C and A Ports
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The power outlet is located on the instrument
panel to the right of the radio. It only operates with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
Load Compartment Power Outlet — If Equipped
The load compartment power outlet is located in
the rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be is
used for powering 12 Volt adapter accessories and
recharging communications devices.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by
using unsuitable adapters.
Power Outlet Fuses — Under Hood
1 — F14 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the instrument panel, to the right of
the radio, to convert DC current to AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter Location
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in
the device. The outlet automatically turns off when
the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is
exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut
down. Once the electrical device has been removed
from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power
ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary
switches located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering column which can be used to
power various electronic devices. Connections to
the switches are found in the right central pillar
fuse panel at the base of the passenger side
B-pillar.
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant battery
feed, while Auxiliary Switch 2 is configured to
ignition feed.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s
Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com
and choosing the appropriate links.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located below the center
stack. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly
charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a
standard that allows wireless charging of your
mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place,
and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
NOTE:
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
With a compatible mobile phone placed on the
charging pad, when the ignition is switched to
the OFF position, a phone reminder message
will appear on the instrument cluster to warn
the customer.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the
phone is connected to a wired charger.
The phone’s protective case must be removed
when placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with
software to protect the device from overheating.
When the software is active, the rate of charge
is slowed down to protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the
pad so that its charging parts connect with the
charging coils of the system. Movement of the
phone during charging may prevent or slow the
rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging effi-
ciency, and may even shut down an application
that is actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®).
This may also cause the phone to overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during
charging such as slowing down the rate of charge.
In certain instances, the device may shut down for a
brief period of time (when the device reaches a
certain temperature). If this happens, it does not
mean there is a fault with the wireless charing pad.
This may just be a protective measure to prevent
damage to the phone.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The control on the left front door panel has
switches that control all power windows. There is a
single opening and closing switch on the front
passenger door for passenger window control.
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
This feature is canceled when either front door is
opened.
Automatic Window Features — If Equipped
Auto-Down Feature
The window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for
half a second, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the auto-down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, lift the window
switch to the detent for less than half a second and
release it to stop the window.
WINDOW BAR GRATES — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part
of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to
protect you and your passengers in the event of an
accident.
Window Bar Grates
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection. Be sure to
clear all objects from the window before closing.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
HOOD
OPENING
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into
the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the right to
release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door windows
are designed to protect you in the event of an
accident. Modification or removal of the grates
could lead to serious injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in
hood slot to secure the hood in the open position.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The cargo area may be equipped with different
options such as optional side panels, rear seats
and an optional floor.
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in
closed position before closing the hood. Damage
may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 53
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 56.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather or up mountain grades. It should
not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of
the normal operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 233.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 55
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000). Before the
pointer reaches the red area, ease up on
the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows instrument cluster display
messages Ú page 56.
Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
US Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or
service. If the technician cannot do so, then the
odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be
placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage
was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading
before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker
is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
The gear selector status “P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4,
etc.” are displayed indicating the gear selector
position. Telltales “1, 2, 3, 4, etc.” indicate the
manual mode has been engaged and the gear
selected is displayed Ú page 81.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located Ú page 122.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display and Controls
This system allows the driver to select a variety
of useful information by pushing the switches
mounted on the instrument panel. Examples of
menu items are:
Buzzer Volume
Exit Menu
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some
customer programmable features will display in
the radio Ú page 134.
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
CAUTION!
The simultaneous illumination of multiple safety
warning lights can signal the failure of the
instrument cluster display. If this happens
contact an authorized dealer
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu and
submenus.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. Push and hold the
OK button for one
second to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
NOTE:
For vehicles with a 3.5 inch instrument cluster
display, press the
OK button to toggle between
mph or km/h.
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection and
a confirmation screen will appear (returning the
user to the first page of the submenu).
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
Pushing the
right arrow button will navigate
through each submenu layer.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Change Engine Oil” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the
OK button.
To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
MAIN MENU
NOTE:
All of the following items are accessed by pressing
the
OK button.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Home
Speedometer Graph
This uses the round bar graph filling to visually
represent current speed. When a speed control
system is active, the graph also provides visual
cues for the different states of that particular
speed control system.
Trip
Vehicles with 7 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
Access to trip information is available through the
following submenus.
Instant Consumption – Shows the instant
consumption in real time (MPG or L/100 km or
km/L).
Average Consumption – Shows the average
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Speed – Shows the average speed
(MPH or KM/H) of Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Travel Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
NOTE:
During the reset the instruction line disappears
and a bar graph appears to indicate the resetting
status; when the bar graph is full the reset is
complete.
Vehicles with 3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
Instant Information – Shows the instantaneous
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) and
distance to empty (mi or km).
Trip A – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
eled, the total elapsed time of travel, average
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L), and
the average speed (MPH or KM/H).
Trip B – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
eled, the total elapsed time of travel, average
consumption (MPG or L/100 km or km/L), and
the average speed (MPH or KM/H).
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Driver Assist
The Driver Assist systems are electronic aids
designed to offer the driver help in certain driving
situations Ú page 86
Vehicle Info
Tire Pressure (TPMS)
TPMS shows the tire status with the numeric
pressure and the unit for each tire, when low
pressure is detected an alert mess and a yellow
telltale will pop-up in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 168.
Oil Temperature
A bar graph in your instrument cluster display will
show your current temperature of your oil.
Battery Voltage
A bar graph in your instrument cluster display will
show your current battery voltage.
Service Information – If Equipped
This feature can provide information on scheduled
maintenance. It will display either “Service
Distance” or “Service Days” Ú page 221.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 59
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist name,
and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Phone
This menu displays the current status of a phone
connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
If no phone is connected, the menu will not
function when the
OK button is pushed. Otherwise,
if a phone is connected, push the
OK button to
enter the menu. The following items will display:
Recent calls: displays a list of the last 10 calls.
SMS reader: displays the last 10 text messages
and if they are read or unread.
Favorite numbers: displays a maximum of 10
favorite numbers.
Navigation
If activated, this menu item will display navigation
status and directions.
Messages
This menu item allows you to display the
information messages/malfunction stored.
The background color of the display varies
according to the priorities of the failure:
Failed Messages with low priority display in
yellow.
Failed Messages with high priority display in red.
SETTINGS
NOTE:
Some items may be displayed and managed
through the Uconnect system. This may vary
according to your vehicle equipment. If equipped,
the following menu/submenu items are available
in the cluster display.
NOTE:
If equipped, some customer programmable
features will display in the Uconnect system
Ú page 134.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3.5 Inch Cluster Settings
*If Equipped
Display Screen Setup
Top Left
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Time
None
Center
Menu Title
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Range To Empty
Average Economy
Current Economy
Odometer
Audio Info
None
Top Right
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Time
None
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
Display
Screen Setup Restore Defaults
Language — Choose Language
Automatic Reset Trip B — Never, Always, 2h, 8h
Phone Repetition in Instrument Panel — On/Off
Navigation Repetition in
Instrument Panel
— On/Off
Units * — —
US, Metric
Imperial, Metric
Units * Custom
Speed MPH, Km/h
Distance Mi, Km
Consumption Km/L, L/100 km/mpg
Pressure Psi, Kpa, Bar
Temperature °C, °F
Clock & Date
Set Time — + / - Selectors
Set Format — 12 hrs, 24 hrs
Set Date — + / - Selectors
Security
Passenger Airbag Double Confirm On / Off
Speed Warning — + / - Selectors
Seat Belt Reminder — On / Off
Hill Start Assist — On / Off
Brakes
Brake Service — —
Auto Park Brake — On / Off
*If Equipped
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Assistance
Warning Buzzer Volume — Off, Low, Medium, High
Backup Alarm — On / Off
Forward Collision — Off, Audio, Audio Brake
Forward Collision Sensitivity — Near, Medium, Far
Side Distance Warning — On / Off
ParkSense — Sound, Sound + Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — Low, Medium, High
Front ParkSense Volume — Low, Medium, High
Lights
Headlight Off Delay — 0, 30, 60, 90
Headlight Sensitivity — 1, 2, 3
Greeting lights — 0, 30, 60, 90
Cornering lights — On / Off
Headlights With Wipers — On / Off
Doors & Locks
Auto Door Locks — On / Off
Auto Unlock On Exit — On / Off
Sound Horn With Lock —
Off - First Press
Off - Second Press
Flash Headlights With Lock — On / Off
Sound Horn With Remote Start — On / Off
Passive Entry —
Off, All Doors, Approach Door,
or On / Off
*If Equipped
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
Security – If Equipped
By selecting the item “Security” you can make the following adjustments:
Passenger Airbag: Front passenger air bag may be enabled or disabled
Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is notified through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a message and a symbol on the
display)
Seat Belt Reminder: This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system
Vehicle Shut Off — —
By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”,
you can turn off the engine from the
instrument cluster. This feature is
available in the event of a Keyless
Ignition system failure, and will display
instructions for turning off the engine via
the instrument cluster display controls.
*If Equipped
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7 Inch Cluster Settings
*If Equipped
Display
Screen Setup
Bottom Center
Odometer
Audio Info
Phone Info
Time
Temperature
Date
Compass
Bottom Right
Time
Odometer
Temperature
Date
Compass
Restore Defaults
Automatic Reset Trip B — Never, Always, 2h, 8h
Phone Repetition in Instrument Panel — On/Off
Navigation Repetition in
Instrument Panel
— Map, Pictogram, Off
Security
Passenger Airbag Double Confirm On / Off
Speed Warning — + / - Selectors
Seat Belt Reminder — On / Off
Hill Start Assist — On / Off
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Security – If Equipped
By selecting the item “Security” you can make the
following adjustments (if equipped):
Passenger Airbag: Front passenger air bag may
be enabled or disabled
Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit,
which the driver is notified through a visual and
acoustic signaling (display of a message and a
symbol on the display)
Seat Belt Reminder: This function is only view-
able when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system
is active
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the
Hill Start Assist system
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Safety & Assitance
Warning Buzzer Volume — Off, Low, Medium, High
Backup Alarm — On / Off
Vehicle Shut Off — —
By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut
Off”, you can turn off the engine from
the instrument cluster. This feature is
available in the event of a Keyless
Ignition system failure, and will
display instructions for turning off the
engine via the instrument cluster
display controls.
*If Equipped
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid
level in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be
a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or
more door(s) are not fully closed. A pop-up
appears on the instrument cluster display
showing which door is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
Drowsy Driver Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
Drowsy driver detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising
drivers to take a break in time. Once a
Drowsy Driver is detected, A pop-up will
display continuously until the driver presses the
OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored
until the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 85.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to inform of
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/
rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does
not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service
Ú
page 216.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate
to signal the failure of one or more safety
warning lights with a corresponding
message. The safety systems that may
cause the Generic Warning Light to illuminate
include but are not limited too: Seat belt Reminder,
Electric Park Brake, Brakes, Air Bag, and Swivel
Seat failure.
The telltale will remain on in case of swivel seat
failure and will blink in case of Air Bag Warning
Light Failure. Contact an authorized dealer
immediately for service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hood Open Warning Light
The telltale turns on when the hood is not
properly closed. Along with the icon, an
image of the vehicle with an open hood
cap appears on the display.
Close the hood properly.
Rear Door Open Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
rear door is open.
NOTE:
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle security system is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon
as possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much
oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime
will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 170.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster display
and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission
fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
Swivel Seat (Driver or Passenger)
Unlocked Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the driver
or passenger seat is unlocked.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 89.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the ABS. The light will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Warning Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security system has detected an
attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate
if a problem with the system is detected. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
Drowsy Driver Detected System Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsy Driver Detected System is not
operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position, and when ESC is activated.
It should turn off with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches the low
threshold, this light will turn on and
remain on until fuel is added.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage.
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible if this occurs.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Active Lane Management Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please
see an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the FCW System or an
external blockage on the frontal camera.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Service Required/Call For Service Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when
service is needed. A pop-up will appear in
the display to signal the need for service.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Speed Limiter Fail Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
failure in the speed limiter system.
Swivel Seat (Driver or Passenger) Fail
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the driver
or passenger swivel seat fails.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned previously, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach
higher temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a
failure with the tow hook. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have
your sensor function checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
you switch FCW off or when driving
conditions obscure the sensor with snow,
heavy rain, or sun.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Ú page 124.
Keyless System Failure Indicator Light
The telltale will illuminate in the event of
keyless system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Rain Sensor Failure Indicator Light
The telltale will illuminate in the case of
failure of the automatic windshield wiper.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Exterior Lights Failure Indicator Light
The telltale will illuminate to indicate a
failure on the following lights: Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) / parking lights /
trailer turn signal indicators (if present) /
trailer lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal
indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake
lights / license plate lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown
protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical
connection. Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take
it to an authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs
Ú
page 116.
Active Speed Limiter Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Active Speed Limiter is on and set to
a specific speed Ú page 86.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic
high beam headlights are on Ú page 33.
Cruise Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is activated
Ú page 88.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light when
the desired speed is set.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 33.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 33.
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator
Lights
The turn signal arrows will flash
independently when left or right turn
signals are selected. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
Pressing the Hazard Warning Flashers button will
illuminate both right and left turn signal arrows
simultaneously Ú page 193.
NOTE:
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the
lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected Ú page 89.
Active Lane Management Indicator
Light — If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management
system is ON, but not armed, the Active
Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 116.
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped With A Premium
Instrument Cluster
This light will illuminate when the Active
Speed Limiter has been turned on, but
not set Ú page 86.
Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on,
the speed warning telltale will illuminate
in the instrument cluster with a number
matching the set speed. When the set
speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along
with pop-up message of speed warning exceeded.
Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 56.
NOTE:
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
Ú
page 133.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready,
you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is
now ready
.
3
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
NORMAL STARTING
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
Proceed as follows:
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine does not start after 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position and wait
10-15 seconds before attempting to restart
the engine.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Press briefly the
START/STOP ignition button and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run but will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
then repeat the “Extended Park Starting”
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the
engine for no more than 10 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 214.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades see Ú page 273.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect settings.
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel
(below the headlamp switch).
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster and an
indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on
the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement.
The parking brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch is OFF but the Brake Warning Light will
not illuminate, however, it can only be released when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either
the released or applied position. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
(Continued)
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a
slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK.
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure
on the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The Brake Warning Light will illuminate,
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always take the key
fob with you and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake Warning
Light flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
EPB system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 145.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured
while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of
the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal.
The occupant status changed to unoccupied.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push
the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With
the Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu-based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light will
flash continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the park brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle, may cause serious damage
to the brake system. Be sure the parking brake
is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do
so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
(K
EYLESS VEHICLE)
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. Also, the transmission remains locked in
PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN
position (engine running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed. This vehicle is equipped
with an additional lock system that holds the
transmission gear selector in NEUTRAL (if vehicle
speed is approximately 0 mph (0 km/h)). To lock
the transmission gear selector in NEUTRAL, the
gear selector must stay in the NEUTRAL position
for approximately three seconds. To shift the
transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE the brake
pedal must be pressed.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition off. When the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent
the transmission gear selector from being moved
out of the PARK position. To shift the transmission
out of the PARK position the first time after
cranking is allowed, ensure swivel seats are locked
in the forward facing position.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear position display (located in
the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
gear range. You must press the brake pedal to
move the gear selector out of PARK. To drive, move
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
DRIVE position.
The electronically controlled transmission provides
a precise shift schedule. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first
few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Gear Selector
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the ERS shift control. Moving
the gear selector into the ERS “-”/”+” position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode,
displays the current gear in the instrument cluster,
and prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear.
In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector forward “-”
or rearward “+” will change the highest available
gear Ú page 85.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the ERS “+”/”-” position
(beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the
transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
(Continued)
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward and to the left until
it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running or the propulsion system
is active. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine running.
The engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through
all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range Ú page 85. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. During extremely cold
temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may
briefly be limited to THIRD gear only. Normal operation
will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in THIRD gear regardless of
which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Transmission
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 130.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 219.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to select the max
gear limit. For example, if you set the transmission gear
limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will not shift
above FOURTH gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Moving the gear
selector to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate
ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the max gear limit. Once in
ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward “-” or
rearward “+” will change the max gear limit.
NOTE:
The transmission will still continue to use the
optimal highest gear, for the current driving condi-
tions, within the selected gear range limit.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
selector into the ERS position, then tap it forward
“-” repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The trans-
mission will shift to the range from which the
vehicle can best be slowed down.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate
TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed,
and the transmission will automatically downshift
(for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance.
If the steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off Ú page 56.
If the steering icon is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service Ú page 56.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Even if the power steering system is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER — IF EQUIPPED
The Active Speed Limiter button is positioned on
the right side of the steering wheel.
Active Speed Limiter Button
This feature allows you to program the maximum
speed of travel for your vehicle.
NOTE:
The Active Speed Limiter can be set with the
vehicle stationary or in motion.
ACTIVATION
To activate the feature, push the Active Speed
Limiter button located on the right side of the
steering wheel. A message will appear along with
an indicator light in the instrument cluster display
to signal that Active Speed Limiter has been
activated.
After the Active Speed Limiter on/off button has
been pushed, you must press the SET (+) or SET (–)
button to set the target speed (or RES button when
there is already a previously set target).
Push the SET (+) or SET (–) button to raise and
lower the target speed to the desired value.
Pushing and holding down the SET (+) or SET (–)
button will increase/decrease the speed value by
increments of 5 mph (5 km/h).
Each time that Active Speed Limiter is activated, it
will be set to the last programmed value from the
previous activation.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control (if equipped) and Adaptive Cruise
Control (if equipped) systems will be unavailable while
the Active Speed Limiter is in use.
EXCEEDING THE SET SPEED
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the
programmed maximum speed can be exceeded
while the device is active.
In the event that the Active Speed Limiter set value
is exceeded manually with a driver acceleration, an
audible indicator will sound. The indicator light will
rapidly flash, and a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
The feature will remain disabled until the vehicle
speed drops below the set Active Speed Limiter
value, where it will reactivate automatically.
DEACTIVATION
To turn off Active Speed Limiter, push the Active Speed
Limiter button on the right side of the steering wheel.
A message will appear in the instrument cluster display
to confirm that the feature has been turned off. You can
also deactivate Active Speed Limiter by pressing the
CANC button. In this case, the system is not completely
turned off, and the driver can reactivate the Active
Speed Limiter by pressing the RES button.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST (ISA) —
IF EQUIPPED
The Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) system
combines the Active Speed Limiter and
Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) systems to
automatically adjust the maximum speed
of the vehicle based on detected traffic signs.
ACTIVATION
To activate the feature, make sure the Traffic Sign
Assist (TSA) system is enabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 134, then push the Active Speed
Limiter button located on the right side of the
steering wheel. The message “Ready” will appear
along with a white indicator light in the instrument
cluster display to signal that the system has been
activated.
While the system is in the “Ready” state, the driver
must press the SET (+), SET (–), or RES button to
engage the system. When the system is fully engaged
and detects the current speed limit using the TSA
system, the message in the instrument cluster display
will indicate the new detected speed limit by suggesting
the driver to press "RES" to accept it.
If the detected speed sign is greater then the
current set speed, an up arrow will be displayed
too. If the detected speed sign is lower then the
current set speed, a down arrow will be displayed
instead. If the driver accepts the new suggested
speed sign, the indicator light will change to green.
Pushing the SET (+) or SET (–) button on the right
of the steering wheel will raise and lower the set
speed to a desired value above or below the set ISA
speed. Pushing and holding down the SET (+) or
SET (–) button will increase/decrease the speed
value by increments of 5 mph (5 km/h).
NOTE:
The Cruise Control (if equipped) and Adaptive
Cruise Control (if equipped) systems will be
unavailable while the ISA system is in use.
EXCEEDING THE SET SPEED
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the
maximum set speed can be exceeded while the
system is active.
When the maximum set speed is exceeded, the
green indicator light will blink and the instrument
cluster display will show an override message for
five seconds, or until the accelerator pedal is
released.
DEACTIVATION
To turn off the Intelligent Speed Assist system,
push the Active Speed Limiter button on the right
side of the steering wheel. A message will appear
in the instrument cluster display to confirm that the
feature has been turned off. The Intelligent Speed
Assist system can also be deactivated by pressing
the CANC button. In this case, the ISA system is
not completely turned off, and the driver can
reactivate the system by pressing the RES button.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of
100 mph (160 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, press the Cruise
Control SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions,
and you could lose control and have an accident.
Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always ensure the system is off
when you are not using it.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button or decrease
the speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently if your
vehicle is not equipped with ACC
Ú
page 88.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes
a radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you
to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
Ú
page 280.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped)
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the set speed will show in the instrument cluster
display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
1 — Distance Setting Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Active Speed Limiter Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
Then proceed to setting the desired speed as
described in the next section.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
The system will also turn off during any of the
conditions listed in “To Turn Off”
Ú
page 93.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the Adap-
tive cruise control light will flash and, if a target
is detected by the sensor, the target graphics
will also flash.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
Desired Driving Speed Through A Detected
Speed Sign
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system allows the
driver to set the detected speed sign Ú page 98 as
the new desired driving speed. The Traffic Sign
Assist (TSA) system will suggest the new detected
speed sign on the cluster and then the driver can
decide to confirm the speed sign capturing by
pressing the RES (resume) button.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure
to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which
mode is selected.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at standstill longer than
two seconds, the driver will either have to push
the RES (resume) button, or apply the acceler-
ator pedal to reengage the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-)
button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
In addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is
normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking tempera-
ture exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and
the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To adjust the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(longer). Once the longest setting is reached, if the
button is pushed again it will be set to the shortest
setting available.
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 92.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a vehicle in
front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand-
still for approximately three consecutive minutes,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
the driver tries to leave the vehicle, the parking
brake will be activated and the ACC system will be
canceled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
RADAR SENSOR UNAVAILABILITY WARNING
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blinded”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
this warning message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blinded” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control can be still enabled.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blinded” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC operation.
“ACC LIMITED FUNCTIONALITY CAMERA
BLOCKED” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due
to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked” and
the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Camera Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane in which you are traveling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to
detect recognizable road signs such as:
Speed limits
School zones
No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the
road sign detected in the unit of measurement
(mph or km/h) selected within Uconnect
Settings or within the instrument cluster display.
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system
will revert to the speed limit signs that are
stored in the Navigation system.
The system always checks the traffic signs indi-
cating the current speed limit signs. The system is
able to recognize and display up to two different
road signs in the instrument cluster display.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within
the Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver
Assistance menu. System ON is signaled by road
signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will
be displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME
screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that
are available through the Uconnect system.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a
graphic in the instrument cluster display.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
(Continued)
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display, and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle
is exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs),
and no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
cluster display, and can display any combination of
signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs)
depending on what information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than
the current speed limit, the display will update
along with an up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
the current speed limit, the display will update
along with a down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to
five seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along
with a newly detected speed limit indicating
special circumstances the driver should be aware
of. Available supplemental information includes:
School
Construction
Rain
Snow
Fog
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed
speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign
on the instrument cluster display will show a red
outline to alert the driver.
1 — Current Speed Limit
2 — No Passing Zone Detected
3 — Next Speed Limit Detected With
Supplemental Information (School Zone)
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver
Assist feature, requiring driver attention at all
times. To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remember that the Active Driver Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot
accurately detect all situations. Complete
attention is always required while driving even
when using ADA.
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that the
Active Driving Assist system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Active Driving Assist system is acti-
vated, deactivated, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described in this section.
Do not use a hand-held device when the Active
Driving Assist system is engaged.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined
with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system,
and centers the vehicle in the driving lane while
traveling at speeds up to 93 mph (150 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see Ú page 89.
NOTE:
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable
speed limit restrictions.
The driver can override ADA at any time by
braking, accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long
as the set distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will also keep
your vehicle centered between the lane lines, and
monitor for other vehicles in adjacent lanes by
utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to
monitor driver attentiveness. ADA requires the
driver’s hands on the steering wheel at all times.
The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle
centered in the lane, but when the driver turns the
steering wheel (e.g. to move farther away from a
large vehicle in the next lane) the system will
reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode.
While in co-steering mode, the system will provide
reduced assistance and allow the driver to control
the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system
will require a few seconds to fully resume lane
centering assistance, especially during curves.
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
fere with the hand detection sensors.
Always pay attention to the road when using
the Active Driving Assist system. ADA will not
steer to avoid safety hazards, construction
zones, objects, or roadway impediments.
You need to maintain control to steer and
brake the vehicle in such situations and when
merging into traffic, entering the highway,
making a turn for crossing traffic, or stopping
for traffic control devices.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic, weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead, position in the lane compared to other
vehicles, and brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
You should not utilize the ADA system:
When driving in complex driving situations
(e.g. urban environments, construction zones,
etc.), adverse weather or low visibility condi-
tions (e.g. rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or
adverse road conditions (e.g. heavy traffic,
worn or missing lane markings, etc.).
When entering a highway on-ramp or exiting
an off-ramp, when driving on roads that are
icy, snow covered, or slippery.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST
O
N OR OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system,
proceed as follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel image will display
white in the instrument cluster display until
the system is engaged. If ACC was previously
turned off, pushing this button will activate
just the lane centering feature of the ADA
system. Push the ACC button to activate both
ACC and ADA Systems.
2. If ACC was active and engaged before pushing the
ADA on/off button, ACC will remain engaged and
ADA will become enabled and then engaged (once
all other conditions are met).
3. If ACC was not enabled before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET
(+) button or the
SET
(-) button and release when the desired
driving speed is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by
pushing the Distance Setting button.
When all system conditions are met as described
in “System Engagement Conditions” in the next
section, the system will engage and the steering
wheel image in the display will change to green.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel
image, the glow effect of the instrument cluster
display will also change to green when ADA is
engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the
system will engage:
Active Driving Assist system is enabled
ACC is active
Driver seat belt is buckled
System detects visible lane markings
Vehicle is traveling below 93 mph (150 km/h)
Vehicle is centered in lane
Turn signal is not activated
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
Driver has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable
speed limit restrictions.
The driver can override ADA at any time by
braking, accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on
the steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped
on the outside. Gripping the inside areas of the
steering wheel will not satisfy the hands-on
condition to engage the system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the
following situations:
If the system has detected driver inattentive-
ness, and has gone through all escalation warn-
ings after hands are no longer detected on the
steering wheel
If lane markings are no longer detected
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is
pushed again (ADA will turn off)
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the
blind spot zone on the same side the turn signal
is being applied)
If the driver applies enough input to the steering
wheel
If the driver’s seat belt is released
If the vehicle speed exceeds 93 mph (150 km/h)
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/
braking
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button
will turn the system off. All other deactivation
conditions will place the system back into the
“enabled” state with the steering wheel indi-
cator displayed in white until all engagement
conditions are met again.
When the system is deactivated, the system
status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state,
and ACC will disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always
be viewed in the instrument cluster display, and
status changes are shown by changes in color of
the system’s indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described Ú page 100, the system
status indicator lights will change from green,
to yellow, to red, while the steering wheel icon
on the display moves up the screen to the center.
The following indicators will change in color as
warnings to the driver escalate:
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
icon in the instrument cluster display)
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver attention is not returned, the system will
deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the
system is not actively providing steering to the
vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
The system detects driver is attentive and is
actively steering the vehicle.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
(Continued)
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Driver inattentiveness has been detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel. This warning is also issued when
the system has detected a tight curve and is
warning the driver to take control
NOTE:
The driver
MUST replace hands on the steering
wheel and take control of the vehicle when the
system is deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
MINIMUM RISK MANEUVER
If the driver’s hands are removed from the steering
wheel, a counter will start in order to display and
activate visual and acoustic alerts. When the
absence of hands is detected, the system will start
Minimum Risk Maneuver for bringing the vehicle in
a safe position.
After 23 seconds from the absence of the hands on
the steering wheel, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system will apply a brake jerk to warn the driver to take
vehicle control. If, after another 3 seconds the driver
does not take the control of the vehicle, the system will
apply a second brake jerk.
Subsequently, if the absence of hands on the steering
wheel persists, the system will apply an automatic
braking intervention to bring the vehicle to the stop.
As soon as the standstill condition is reached, the
hazard emergency lights will be activated. Then, the
system will unlock the doors (if previously locked). If the
driver takes control of the vehicle during the Minimum
Risk Maneuver by placing the hands on the steering
wheel or pressing the pedal throttle, the system will
behave normally and the Minimum Risk Maneuver will
be stopped.
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue a
steering wheel vibration to accompany these warnings.
The vibration warning (if enabled) will occur if the
vehicle crosses a lane marker, for example, when
driving on a tight curve. This feature can be turned
on or off within the Uconnect system
Ú
page 134.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver
Assist feature, requiring driver attention at all
times. To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remember that the Active Driver Assist
system is a convenience system that cannot
accurately detect all situations. Complete
attention is always required while driving even
when using ADA.
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that the
Active Driving Assist system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Active Driving Assist system is acti-
vated, deactivated, or otherwise lacks full
functionality as described in this section.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
Turn your vehicle
Change lanes
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component
of ADA. For ACC system limitations Ú page 89.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited
or reduced functionality when one of the following
conditions occur:
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the
suspension, installing different sized wheels
or tires)
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of the system (e.g. during a parking
maneuver), see Ú page 110.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for
controlling the vehicle's movements.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
obstacle is detected, as long as the system is on.
Do not use a hand-held device when the Active
Driving Assist system is engaged.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
fere with the hand detection sensors.
Always pay attention to the road when using the
Active Driving Assist system. ADA will not steer to
avoid safety hazards, construction zones, objects,
or roadway impediments. You need to maintain
control to steer and brake the vehicle in such situ-
ations and when merging into traffic, entering the
highway, making a turn for crossing traffic, or stop-
ping for traffic control devices.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
When the gear selector shifted to NEUTRAL or
PARK, the system becomes inactive. When the
vehicle is moving forward, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed remains below
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Reducing the
speed approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h), the
system will come back active. When the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE, the system will remain active
as long as the speed remains below the maximum
operating speed of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the
maximum speed limit is exceeded, the system is
disabled and the ParkSense switch LED will
illuminate. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed reduces below approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle.
The system will be automatically activated as soon
as the trailer is removed.
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the rear
fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located
in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 39 inches
(100 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the
center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches
(60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
that would clear the underside of the vehicle
during the parking maneuver.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected in the
Uconnect system Ú page 134.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 56. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the
left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front & Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
59 inches
(150 cm)
59–52 inches
(150-130 cm)
52-41 inches
(130-105 cm)
41-34 inches
(105-85 cm)
34-24 inches
(85-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
39 inches (100 cm)
39-32 inches
(100-80 cm)
32-24 inches
(80-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 134.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 56 will show the “ParkSense Disabled”
message for approximately five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
When the ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate
a single chime, and it will show the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message for five seconds. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST FAILURE
I
NDICATIONS
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors
or system is indicated, during REVERSE
gear engagement, by the instrument
panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
displayed in the instrument cluster display
(if equipped) Ú page 65.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
Failures are indicated immediately if they occur
when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense
system is unavailable, without reference to the
sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor
fails, the entire system must be disabled.
The system is turned off automatically.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
(Continued)
PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
U
SAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system and Side Distance Warning off if objects
such as bicycle carriers, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving.
The operation of the rear sensors is automati-
cally deactivated when the trailer's electric plug
is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket,
while the front sensors stay active and can
provide acoustic and visual warnings. The rear
sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure
to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected when they
are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
If it is necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly presence in the sensor field of view.
The filtering operation must be performed only by
an authorized dealer.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using
the parking sensors located in the front and rear
fascia/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if this feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 134.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and, when enabled, with visual indications
on the instrument cluster display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Front
ParkSense volume and chime type.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear
ParkSense volume and chime type.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
on when the system is sounding an audible tone.
An audible tone will only sound if a collision is
possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the Settings menu of the Uconnect
system. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via
the ParkSense hard switch, then the Side Distance
Warning system will automatically be deactivated.
The system will automatically deactivate if any
door is opened.
ParkSense Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 –
24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the
vehicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system and Side Distance Warning off if objects
such as bicycle carriers, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving.
The operation of the rear sensors is automati-
cally deactivated when the trailer's electric plug
is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket,
while the front sensors stay active and can
provide acoustic and visual warnings. The rear
sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
If it is necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly presence in the sensor field of view.
The filtering operation must be performed only by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using Side Distance Warning. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using Side Distance Warning, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will
be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Side Distance Warning is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Side Distance Warning in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular
parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions through
the instrument cluster display, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the system is capable of maneuvering a
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space
on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is provided to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
It is important to keep the sensors clean in order for
the system to operate correctly. During cleaning
make sure not to scratch or damage them; avoid
using dry or rough cloths. The sensors should be
washed using clean water with addition of car
shampoo if necessary. In washing stations, clean
the sensors quickly, keeping the steam jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10 cm) away
from the sensors.
New vehicles from the dealership must have at
least 31 miles (50 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature.
The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes.
The automatic emergency braking feature is
NOT intended to substitute for the driver during
REVERSE maneuvers.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time
will disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space.
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
If parking maneuver has not been completed
after 3 minutes.
ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
Driver's door is opened.
Load compartment door is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Axle Locker is active.
Trailer is connected.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is active.
Snowplow is connected.
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
Driver's door is closed.
Load compartment door is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the preceding
conditions are not present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to Switch Maneuver” message will appear
in the instrument cluster display. You may select
perpendicular, parallel, or parallel park exit. The arrow
buttons on the left side of the steering wheel can be
used to switch parking maneuvers.
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selecting A Side
When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a
parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
NOTE:
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, etc. from surrounding
objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple avail-
able parking spaces, the system will only indicate
the last detected parking space for the maneuver).
A parking space is considered invalid after the
vehicle is 32 ft (10 m) or more away from it.
Searching For A Parking Space
Through the side sensors, the system will continuously
search for a free parking space suitable for the
dimensions of the vehicle. While searching the vehicle
should continue driving below 18 mph (30 km/h).
When looking for a parallel parking space keep the
vehicle 1.5 ft to 5 ft (50cm to 1.5 m) from parked
vehicles. When looking for a perpendicular parking
space keep the vehicle 3 ft to 6 ft (1 m to 2 m) from
parked vehicles.
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to
check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering
wheel, before instructing the driver to check
surroundings and complete the parking maneuver.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
(Continued)
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in
front of you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors’ field of view will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulders when using the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system.
WARNING!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense switch once. After selection, the system
activates and warns the driver on the instrument
cluster display about the operations that have to
be carried out to perform the maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction
that you want to perform the maneuver. Use the
right arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to
the right side and use the left arrow indicator to
perform the maneuver to the left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the driver to
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel
and use the brake or accelerator pedals as instructed,
while the system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues to
carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the
steering wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or
holding the steering wheel to prevent its movement),
the maneuver will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system
gives back the vehicle control to the driver.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward-facing camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel,
as well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide
an audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
LaneSense is a driving assist system, not an
emergency system, and does not replace the
driver. The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle and must intervene as
required. The LaneSense system is designed to
assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button twice (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
display will show the left lane line flashing yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both the lane
markings have been detected, the system is armed
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if
an unintentional lane departure occurs. The lane
lines turn from gray to white and the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow
Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 134.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE and/or when the rear doors are opened.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
Rear Back Up Camera is located on the top rear of
the vehicle below the center light.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or
when the rear doors are closed, the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears.
When engaged in the REVERSE gear, with Camera
Delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds after switching
out of the REVERSE position, unless the speed of
the vehicle does not exceed 8 mph (13 km/h), or
that the gear is placed in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position. The touchscreen X button to disable the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
NOTE:
The image displayed on the display may appear
slightly deformed.
When displayed, active grid lines will illustrate the
width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL), and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect system Ú page 134.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View system
is exited and the last known screen appears again.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the Back Up Camera button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated via
the touchscreen X button, the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
back up path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View system is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera
button located in the Controls screen within the
Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display.
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
Top View will show which sliding doors are open.
Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
Rear View. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
Front View. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view.
NOTE:
If the Back Up Camera was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of screen
display will return to the Surround View menu.
If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will
return to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than
8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE
and the touchscreen X button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 134.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on
the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure to use the correct replacement
cap for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel Filler
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
NOTE:
During fuel fill, nozzle position could affect the flow
of fuel. For best results, allow the nozzle to rest
naturally in the filler tube - do not raise the handle
to increase the fill angle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid.
The Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
ties into the fuel system.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
NOTE:
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a “Check Fuel Cap” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
Ú
page 56.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
If the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started. See an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door
or B-pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the
driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour (MDH) of manufacture
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with
no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear axle of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose
items securely before driving. If weighing the
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), but the
total load is within the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), you must redistribute the
weight. Improper weight distribution can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and
handles and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 123.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation”
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported
by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 123.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, an electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue
weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer
axle(s). When used in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level
ride, offering more consistent steering and brake
control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition
of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing)
Hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights
(TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
(Continued)
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard for the maximum combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú
page 253.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 221. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
CAUTION!
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 249.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and may be required for
any trailer, for example trailers in excess of 2,
000 lb (907 kg). Trailer brake requirements vary
by local law, consult local legal requirements
where the trailer is to be towed for trailer brake
requirements.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from
the vehicle (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connectors) before
launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Tail Lamp
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Tail Lamp
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at
low speeds, holding your vehicle in FIRST gear
(using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control) on more severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Recreational towing is allowed
ONLY
if the front wheels
are
OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Release the Electric Park Brake.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of
the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
133
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5
With 7-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be
able to send or receive information from a wired or
wireless network. This information allows systems
and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately, Ú page 275, or
refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual
for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to
learn about available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer immediately.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of
the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
SCROLL/ENTER control knob located on the right side.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control knob
one or more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
For The Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display And The
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display.
The available languages are English, French, and Spanish.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more
customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will
decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will
decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h),
“Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this
setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting
will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”,
“Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off. For more information about Voice Barge-in,
refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List on the Voice Recognition window to be shown on or off.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened,
the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On”
and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual for further information.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings Ú page 147.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Setting Name Description
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
Display
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display.
The available languages are English, French, and Spanish.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically.
The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting
will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease
the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease
the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or km/h),
“Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark”
and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the
headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds.
The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of
a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to
the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from
the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate
the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is
detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available options are
“Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area.
The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”,
and “High”.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the system.
The “On”setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The available
options are “Sound” which provides only an audible chime and “Sounds & Display” which provides
both a sound and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Drowsy Driver Detection
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indicating that the
driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot.
The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert
lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors
and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will detect the length of a trailer. “Auto” will automatically detect the length. “Max” sets all
trailers to 39.5 ft (12 m).
Setting Name Description
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the
GPS location.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours and minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours and minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting
will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll through the
available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On”
and “Off”.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
Phone/Bluetooth®
Voice
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”,
“Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the
system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the
Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of
what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Mirrors & Wipers
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the
vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Greeting Lights
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the
headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a
light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights dependent on the amount of visible
light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the
lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and
“Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Brakes
Doors & Locks
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a pop-up will
display with “Yes” and “No” options.
Hold ‘n Go This setting will turn the Hold ‘n Go on or off.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob on or off.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will
not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when
the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all
the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock
button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) between “Off”, “All”,
and “Approach”.
Setting Name Description
When the Key Off Options Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off. The available
options are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off with Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the
vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase
more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “max”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available settings are
“Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With “Recall Last”, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle
shut off.
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation,
etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Software Updates
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are
“On” and “Off”.
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software License
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software
version.
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about
the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing
information of your radio.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and
“Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system,
including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8 inches (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 280.
5
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining
vehicle control under adverse braking conditions.
The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump
motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
The ABS includes an yellow ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning.
The system reverts to standard non-ABS. Placing the
ignition in the OFF mode and to the ON mode again may
reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary.
When you are in a severe braking condition
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the
base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
that the system is functioning properly.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Crosswind
Assist (CWA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). These systems
complement the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by
optimizing the vehicle braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
The system detects an emergency braking situation
by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Crosswind Assist (CWA)
CWA helps keep your vehicle from drifting out of its lane
due to unexpected crosswinds by means of targeted
braking of individual wheels. The system will provide
automatic stability assistance to counteract the effect
of strong side wind. If a strong lateral wind is detected,
front and rear brakes on the affected side are applied,
creating a steering effect that mitigates the crosswind
influence. During system intervention, the driver should
perceive the natural stable handling feel of the vehicle.
Crosswind Assist will activate automatically when
the vehicle reaches speeds above approximately
43 mph (70 km/h). When the system is activated,
the ESC Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
blink to warn the driver.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The ERM system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
determines that the rate of change of the steering
wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel
lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the previous conditions listed. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC OFF button is located in the
center switch bank, next to the hazard
flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for
ESC equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned off for the following
specific reasons.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the
ESC OFF button.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of
ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in the
“Partial Off” mode, ESC will operate without engine
torque management. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
of operation.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
Off” mode by pushing the ESC OFF button. Once
the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button.
This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine running. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver
when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA
will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver
applied for a short period of time after the driver
takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver
does not apply the throttle during this short period
of time, the system will release brake pressure and
the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts
to move in the intended direction of travel.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
when the activation criteria have been met.
The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed
in NEUTRAL or PARK.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(in the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to
spin. This indicates that the TCS is active. If the
indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch
off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
the system will not activate and slight rolling may
occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and apply
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
the sway of the trailer.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
Ú
page 124.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced, and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) —
IF EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued
and warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
SYSTEM OPERATION
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed,
and from the front camera, the system implements
two operating logics:
The first operating logic takes the driving style
into account, observing the road and detecting
to what extent the driver can continue driving
with few lane crossing events.
The second operating logic measures the time
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 100 mph
(160 km/h).
WARNING!
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded.
The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of
driving the vehicle. Always drive alert and get
plenty of rest before driving. If you experience
fatigue while driving, do not wait for the DDD to
intervene with a warning. Choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over safely
for a break. Only return to the road when you are
in the right physical and mental condition to
prevent endangering yourself and others.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
If the driving style indicates that the driver is
unable to follow the road trajectory and respect the
horizontal lane markings while within the operating
speed range of the system, a pop up will display on
the instrument cluster display to suggest that the
driver should stop for a break. An audible signal
will also sound.
If the driver
accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side
of the steering wheel, the message will disappear
from the display.
If the driver
does not acknowledge
the warning, it will
be displayed for 60 seconds and then disappear.
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
DDD Warning Message
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system
can function properly. Do not block the taillights
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance due
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
indicators in the side view mirrors will be on.
The warning indicators will remain illuminated until
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system, cycle
the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 161.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 280.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic, and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
Path is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection
of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once
the trailer has been detected, the system will
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in
the instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 134.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
“trailer detection request” is enabled by the
system once the vehicle resumes motion.
The maximum trailer length supported by the
Trailer Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m).
Trailer length is considered the forward most
portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward most
portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of
the trailer.
The maximum width supported by the Trailer
Merge Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer
width is measured at the widest portion of the
trailer and may include wheels, tires, finders,
or rails.
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots,
narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any other
crowded area may prevent the radar sensors from
being able to adequately detect the trailer. The
system will try to detect a trailer at every ignition
cycle or 90 seconds of standstill.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one
of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft
(3 m to 6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to 20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft
(6 m to 9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to 30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft
(9 m to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to Max distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be
subject to being placed in the category above or
below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by
the illumination of the BSM Warning Light located
in the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle
is detected on. In addition, an audible (chime) alert
will be heard and radio volume will be reduced
Ú page 161.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of
false alerts. This is normal operation.
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking camera as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. Vehicles With Automatic Trans-
mission: After the end of the intervention of automatic
braking, the transmission may remain in last gear
stored — therefore the vehicle could lurch forward, once
the brakes release a few seconds later. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated for the first
20 seconds from braking actuation.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled with the unavailable
screens Ú page 280.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings Ú page 134.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition position to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will maintain its status in the next
key cycle.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 134.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
If the front camera is blocked due to external
environmental conditions (i.e. heavy rain, snow,
fog), the system will be deactivated and a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays: “FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
this indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
The “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message can
sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path, this warning may temporarily
occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the
driver should examine the fascia/bumper where
the camera is located. It may require cleaning or
removal of an obstruction from the fascia/bumper
cover.
The FCW Warning Light will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the front camera
is obstructed by sun or other visibility reducing
weather.
NOTE:
If the “FCW Temporarily Unavailable” message
occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the camera realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
camera and inhibit FCW operation.
Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use
solvents or abrasive pastes.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore
always pay particular attention, while maintaining
control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of
the vehicle, but that does not preside in the same
lane. In cases such as this, the system might
respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of
vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but placed
outside the field of action of the camera and could
therefore not react in the presence of small
vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, while staying
in the traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the
field of action of the camera, may cause the
intervention of the system.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
that crossed the range of the camera in an
oncoming intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) system which provides the driver
with audible warnings and visual warnings, in the
instrument cluster display. It may apply limited
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian/cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes. When the
system determines a collision with the pedestrian/
cyclist in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
The minimum speed for PEB activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision
with the pedestrian/cyclist.
PEB is turned on and off using the FCW button in
the Uconnect display in the control settings.
Ú page 134.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
S
YSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 249 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire Ú page 280.
Base System
This is the TPMS Warning Light located in
the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible
chime will be activated, and the “Check tire
pressure” message will display when one or more
of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each
tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected, an audible
chime will be activated and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Unavailable” message will display.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists.
The TPMS Warning Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size spare
wheel.
1. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If a spare tire not equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor is used,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn on, flashing
for 75 seconds and then remaining solid for
each subsequent ignition key cycle.
3. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
NOTE:
For correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System
behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in
key-off during each tire substitution.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
Ú
page 185.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 185.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
(Continued)
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 275 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at
all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV (START)
or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV (START) or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied).
The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
(Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
WARNING!
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a colli-
sion if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it
is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
Ú
page 188. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Front Bucket Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Location
Front Bench Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully
pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
S
YSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV (START) or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off.
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system
is designed to inflate based on the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death.
Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no longer
be functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam
into the space between the occupant and the door.
The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such
a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at
an even greater risk of injury from a deploying
air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might get
sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are
not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off switch.
In the event of an accident, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Fuel Cut Off Switch may perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the
engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the hazard light button is pressed.
The hazard lights can be deactivated by
pressing the hazard light button.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power.
Unlock the power door locks.
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an
event push the “A” Button located underneath the
front passenger side instrument panel.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut
Off Switch to avoid the risk of fire. Before
resetting the Fuel Cut Off Switch, carefully check
for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights).
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial
Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing
child restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt
can be locked to secure a child restraint, there are no
tether anchorages to complete the proper installation
of a forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a
child in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger
seat should be moved to the full rearward position and
the child must be in a proper restraint system based on
its age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below
to secure the child restraint using the seat belt.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the
lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and
then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor.
If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while
the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. See the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
Ú
page 176 for
additional information on ALR.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air
bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to
infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú
page 133.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System
has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 170.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
(Continued)
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
193
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM
Assist And SOS Buttons
The overhead console contains an SOS and ASSIST
button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 280.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and connected to an operable
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termi-
nation of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED
light on the overhead console.
2. The LED lights located within the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the overhead console
will turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within the
SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s elec-
trical system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P) or
REVERSE (R) for manual transmission.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND TOOLS LOCATION
Depending on vehicle trim level, the jack and tools
are stored under the front passenger seat in a box,
or strapped behind the driver seat in a tool bag.
Tools may vary.
Jack Tool Bag Location — If Equipped
Jack Kit Location — If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To release the jack kit from its storage location,
turn the lock knob a quarter turn counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
Lock Knob
To open the jack kit container, you must push
the container’s release to separate the top and
bottom.
Container Release
Jacking Tools
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. Attach the lug bolt
adapter to the winch extension and insert it
into the winch mechanism.
Jack Tools
CAUTION!
Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to
lock knob may occur.
1 — Unlock Position
2 — Lock Position
1 — Tow Eye — If Equipped
2 — Wrench Handle
3 — Lug Bolt Adapter
4 — Jack
5 — Reversible Tool — If Equipped
6 — Tool Handle — If Equipped
7 — Winch Extension
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Winch Extension
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
Winch Location
The winch mechanism is located under the
rear of the vehicle in between the right rear tire
and spare tire.
Winch Extension
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
Lowering Spare Tire
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Spare Tire
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance
to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Retainer
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
Assembled Jack
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and place an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the
wheel that is to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body.
Jacking Engagement Locations
NOTE:
The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
NOTE:
The rear jacking location is located in front of the
rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter
on the jack screw and turn clockwise until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described
location.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the wrench handle and lug
bolt adapter. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel
lug bolts.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
left, making sure it is securely on the ground.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on
the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway)
Ú page 269.
Torque Patterns
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
9. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire by
reinstalling the wheel retainer and using the
cable winch mechanism to securely tighten
under the vehicle before driving.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Reinstalling The Retainer
Damaged Wheel Stowage
10. Install the winch extension and rotate the
wrench handle clockwise until the winch
mechanism operator hears “three clicks” from
the device to indicate the wheel is properly
stowed under the vehicle.
11. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle
tools back in the storage compartment.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as
required.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
The center cap must be pushed out from the rear
to install the retainer and stow the tire.
WHEEL COVERS
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place
by the wheel lug bolts and can be removed after
the wheel lug bolts are taken off.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Depending on vehicle trim level,
tire service kit models may vary.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with the Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. The Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the
hub cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap
finish may occur.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump oper-
ation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior
to the expiration date (printed at the lower right
hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. See the
Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for
further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use
and needs to be replaced after each use. Always
replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump and
make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air
Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting
the sealant into the deflated tire and running
the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set
the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose
and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free
of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the
valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob
is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle,
if available. Make sure the vehicle is running
before turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
is empty. Continue to operate the pump
and inflate the tire to the cold tire
inflation pressure found on the tire and loading
information label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the
steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant
within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting the
sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at
the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired
or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you. Have the tire
checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold
tire inflation pressure found on the tire
and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps in reverse order.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use
and needs to be replaced after each use. Always
replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to
ensure optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
ALTERNATE TIRE SERVICE KIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Depending on vehicle trim levels, the Tire Service
Kit designs may vary and can be stored in the
driver’s door pocket or the passenger’s side
compartment area.
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
Tire Service Kit Components
WARNING!
As required by current regulations, the information
on chemical substances for the protection of human
health and the environment and on the safe use
of the sealing fluid are on the packaging label.
Compliance with the indications on the label is
an essential condition to ensure the safety and
effectiveness of the product. Remember to carefully
read the label before use. The user of the product is
responsible for any damages caused by improper
use. The sealing fluid has an expiration date.
Replace the bottle if the sealant has expired.
CAUTION!
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid
properly. Have them disposed of in compliance
with national and local regulations.
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and
turn to this position for air pump oper-
ation only. Use the Black Air Pump
Hose (5) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (3) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (1)
once to turn on the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button (1)
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3)
are a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment
(on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport
balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use
only the Air Pump Hose (5) and make sure the Mode
Select Knob (2) is in the Air Mode when inflating
such items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in
the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hoses (3) and (5) to reach the valve stem and
keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in
this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to
the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
(3) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (1), the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (4)
through the Sealant Hose (3) and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (3)
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose (3) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (2) is in the Sealant Mode
position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (1) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another
vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is
running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose (3).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose (3), the Pressure Gauge (8) can read
as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8)
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire pressure label on the driver-side latch
pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of
the Sealant Bottle (4) and place the sticker on
the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (3)
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the
tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 211.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to
the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (8).
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internal Tire Service Kit components which may
cause permanent damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire and loading information
label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) assembly at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible Ú page 213.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (4)
and Sealant Hose (3) prior to the expiration
date (printed at the upper right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system
Ú
page 213.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
3. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand corner
of the kit.
4. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
5. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
6. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (3) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the housing.
Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then push the bottle into the housing
by holding the button. An audible click will be
heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
Release the button.
7. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (3) and return the
hose to its storage area (located on top of the
housing).
8. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are located
under the hood, in the engine compartment on the
driver's side.
The Remote positive (+) Post is covered with a
protective cap located on the side of the Front
Power Distribution Center.
The Remote negative
(-) Post is located on the core
support closest to the front of the vehicle.
Jump Starting Locations
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the reach of the
jumper cables, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system
may occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
The remote positive
(+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver's side under the
cover of the Front Power Distribution Center.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to the remote negative post or a
good engine ground of the discharged vehicle.
A “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
NOTE:
The remote negative
(-) post is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the driver's side.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery. Let the engine idle a few
minutes and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative
(-)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the discharged vehicle, and reinstall the
protective cap.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
BATTERY LOCATION
There are two remote jump starting posts under
the hood which is the recommended jump start
location. If access to the battery is needed, an
access panel on the driver’s side floor will allow for
battery access.
Battery Access Panel
Battery Location
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the shifter boot material of the gear
selector by pulling up to carefully separate the
gear selector bezel and boot assembly from
the console.
Shifter Boot And Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
gear selector override release and push down
while depressing the shifter button at the
same time.
Gear Selector Override Release Lever
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shifter boot and bezel.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you
hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Shift back
and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button, to place the Electronic
Stability Control System (ESC) in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 154.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC ON” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire
could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
Ú page 78 feature is disabled before towing this
vehicle to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total elec-
trical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to
raise the rear wheels off the ground when
moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is
opened (if the battery is connected, ignition is
ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle
with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the
brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK (P) for
towing Ú page 217.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
7
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
towed (with front wheels on the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km), tow with the front
wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 183.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 185.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front
wheels on the ground can cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
approved requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
221
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument
cluster. This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 57.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear door net block gap, adjust/replace as necessary. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Inspect the cabin air filter, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Replace the Brake Fluid every two years.
1
X X X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs.
1
X
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level
to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out any residual
water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of
fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Never smoke while working in the engine
compartment: gas and flammable vapors may
be present, with the risk of fire.
Be very careful when working in the engine
compartment when the engine is hot: you may
get burned. Do not get too close to the radiator
cooling fan: the electric fan may start; danger
of injury. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing
might be pulled by moving parts.
CAUTION!
Be careful not to confuse the various types of
fluids while topping up: they are not compatible
with each other! Topping up with an unsuitable
fluid could severely damage your car.
The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.
Always top up using engine oil of the same
specifications as that already in the engine.
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
engine to cool down before loosening the filler
cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminum
caps (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar® All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent,
used with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line
clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water
Ú
page 214.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 273.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet
or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance
Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 222.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With a suitable tool, loosen the clamps and
remove the engine air duct supply hose.
Engine Air Duct Supply Hose
2. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on
the engine air cleaner filter cover and remove
the cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if signif-
icant dirt or debris is present before replacing the
engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
4. Install the engine air duct supply hose and
tighten the clamps
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
1 — Clamps
2 — Engine Air Duct Supply Hose
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized
dealer or other service facilities using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter for
the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 222.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in
the engine compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter
retainer to the fresh air inlet, and remove the
filter retainer.
Accessing Air Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
2. Remove and replace the cabin air filter from
the filter retainer.
Removing Air Filter
3. Install the cabin air filter/filter retainer back into
the fresh air inlet. When installing the filter retainer
make sure the retainer is fully engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly to
secure the filter retainer to the fresh air inlet.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and
to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — Cabin Air Filter
3 — Cabin Air Filter Retainer
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you
Ú
page 192.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those materials that
come into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condi-
tion. In the event of engine malfunction, particu-
larly involving engine misfire or other apparent
loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with
a severe malfunction could cause the converter to
overheat, resulting in possible damage to the
converter and vehicle.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS-12106) only by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 222.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 273.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
The vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
that allows extended maintenance intervals.
This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important to use the
same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead and turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON mode.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically Ú page 222.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood service
or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes the fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake linings
wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted Ú page 273.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended
brake fluid Ú page 273. Using the wrong type
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid Ú page 274. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 9-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore
the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick
is provided. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 274.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
(Continued)
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems,
(engine system, transmission system) steering
system or Body Control Module (BCM) blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motor with
water.
WARNING!
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. To access the fuses, remove the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
Removal of the two cover screws is necessary before accessing the fuses.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Fuse Access Cover Screw Location
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 50 Amp Red – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02 20 Amp Yellow (3.6 Gasoline Engine) – Starter Relay
F03 30 Amp Green – VSIM *
F04 50 Amp Red (3.6 Gasoline Engine) –
Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC) / Trans Power
ECU / Vacuum Pump / KL30 for the Shifter Transmission
Module [STM]
F05 50 Amp Red (3.6 Gasoline Engine) – EPB Valves & MOC
F06
40 Amp Orange (non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – – Spare
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 ECM/ KL15 Starter Relay Coil
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM) / Injectors
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM) / KL30 Main Relay Coil
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor *
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM) / Ignition Coils
F23 – 30 Amp Green TT MOD
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum Pump Relay Coil
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the front
PDC Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F61 30 Amp Green Vacuum Pump
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE
F65 15 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Mod
F66 15 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Mod
F67 5 Amp Beige Rear Roll Up Door *
F68 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM)
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F33 7.5 Amp Brown +30 TTM
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM / USB Power Out / USB Recharge / TBM / RRM / DLC)
F37 7.5 Amp Brown INT (IPC – DASM / AEB)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM / BRAKE NC) / EPS
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (RRM / TTM / SBDU / XAN / JHC / RFX)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 7.5 Amp Brown INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX) / HALF / DRVM/ PAM / CVPM / EMC / TCM / STM / ASS / SGW
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the
interior side at the base of the passenger side
B-pillar.
Fuse Panel Location Fuse Panel
F53 7.5 Amp Brown +30 (IPC) + Keyless – GO / Passive Entry / Brake NO / EPB SW
F94 15 Amp Blue Not Used
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F82 30 Amp Green Inverter Power Outlet
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) *
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) *
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Dome Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Cargo Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp (Halogen – If Equipped) H11LL
High Beam Headlamp (Halogen – If Equipped) 9005LL
Low Beam Headlamp LED
High Beam Headlamp LED
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Halogen – If Equipped) T20
Daytime Running Lamps (Halogen – If Equipped) T20
Front Park/Turn Signal/Daytime Running Lamps LED
Front Side Marker Lamps (Halogen – If Equipped) W3W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen – If Equipped) PSX24W
Front Fog Lamps LED
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps W21/5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W5W
License Plate Lamps (Halogen – If Equipped) C5W
License Plate Lamps (RR Roll Up Door – If Equipped) LED
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
HEADLAMPS LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
See the following steps to replace:
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Remove the headlamp retaining screws.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly from the
vehicle (by moving the headlamp to release
the lower slides from the headlamp mounting
on the vehicle).
4. Disconnect the headlamp harness electrical
connector.
5. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back
of the headlamp housing.
6. Detach the wire connector from the bulb.
7. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove
it from the reflector.
8. Install a new bulb.
9. Rotate the new bulb clockwise to lock it in
place.
10. Reinstall the wire connector.
11. Reinstall the access cap and rotate to lock into
place.
12. Connect the headlamp harness electrical
connector.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
14. Reinstall the headlamp screws.
15. Connect the negative battery terminal.
16. Check lights to make sure they are operating
correctly.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove the
headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
9. Install the one upper retaining screw on
headlamp housing.
10. Install the two lower retaining screws on
headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
12. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP (DRL)/FRONT SIDE
MARKER LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from the
headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove the
headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Remove the (DRL), side marker bulb by pulling
straight out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
10. Install the one upper retaining screw on the
headlamp housing.
11. Install the two lower retaining screws on the
headlamp housing.
12. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
13. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb
replacement.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on
the wheel liner.
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb
replacement.
FRONT, REAR ROOF LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp
assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counter-
clockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise
to lock in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP, TURN SIGNAL AND
REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the seven (7) fasteners from the rear
access cover and remove cover to gain access
to the tail lamp assembly fasteners.
Rear Access Cover
3. Remove the two (2) 17 mm tail lamp assembly
fasteners.
4. Disconnect the tail lamp harness connector
and remove tail light assembly from the
vehicle.
5. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and
rear side marker bulb/socket by rotating
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
7. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to
lock in place.
8. Reinstall lamp.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Interior Bulbs
CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Using a suitable tool, remove either the lamp
above the back door or the sliding door lamp
as needed and disconnect it.
Rear Cargo Lamp Bulb Access
2. Using a suitable tool, pull open the metal bulb
access on the back of the housing.
Cargo Lamp Bulb Location
3. Remove and install the replacement bulb.
4. Close the bulb access, connect the lamp and
install the lamp into place.
DOME LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Using a suitable tool, insert the tip at the
location shown and press inward to the lamp
to relieve the spring tension. This will allow
you to easily drop the dome lamp assembly
from its bracket and disconnect the lamp.
Dome Lamp Assembly Location
2. Using a suitable tool, flex the housing to lift the
light pod cover away from the unit.
Dome Lamp Light Pod Cover
1 — Spring Tension Relief Access
2 — Dome Lamp Assembly
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
3. Remove and replace the bulbs as needed.
Dome Lamp Light Bulbs
4. Close the housing cover making sure it snaps
together properly and connect the lamp.
5. Install overhead console into place making
sure to seat the assembly’s forward end first
and then snapping it flush so that the tension
spring is fully seating in the housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturers recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard
Ú page 123.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 123.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lb (392 kg).
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation
pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after being driven under a Run Flat
mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more information Ú page 168.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” for further
information Ú page 218.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed. Refer
to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this
section. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire Ú page 250.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent
in size and type to the original equipment
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 128.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a TPMS sensor.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a TPMS sensor.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
listed on your Tire And Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge
of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
(Continued)(Continued)
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance the following traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
Please see the following table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
All Front
LT225/75R16E
225/75R16C
Quality Chain Corp Light Truck Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire chain
or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION!
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 222. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
3 weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting prior to storing. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather, and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
269
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake System Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
145 ft-lb
(197 N·m)
M16 x 1.50 21 mm
9
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 271
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run
on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasolines to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 273
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24 gal 90 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 10.5 qt 10 L
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have
the API Starburst trademark Ú page 228.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
9
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4. DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
275
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know
your vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service.
FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit
chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
10
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if
you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance services last for five years or
60,000 miles on the odometer, whichever occurs
first, calculated from the start date of the Basic
Limited Warranty, as set forth in your Warranty
Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club,
Inc. Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY,
where services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of
California, Inc., Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out
of gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service
or towing as a result of a mechanical breakdown,
dial toll-free: USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada:
1-800-363-4869. Provide your name, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) required for covered
services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you
are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions.
You will be given the name of the service provider
and an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are
in an unsafe situation, please let us know. With
your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will
reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that
service in the area where they were provided. FCA US
LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is final.
Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program
at any time. The Roadside Assistance program is
subject to restrictions and conditions of use, which
are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire,
we will dispatch a service provider to use your
vehicle’s temporary spare tire (if equipped)
as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home.
We will dispatch a service provider to deliver a
small amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get
you to a nearby station. This service is limited to
two occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry
about being stranded. We will dispatch a service
provider to provide you with a battery jump
anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or
frozen locks are keeping you from getting on your
way, help is just a phone call away. This service is
limited to providing access to the vehicle’s seating
area. It does not cover the cost of replacement
keys.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 277
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as
a result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside
Assistance will dispatch a towing service to
transport your vehicle to the closest authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer. If you
choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance
exceeds 10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment
at its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter
users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service
operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English/(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
10
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the
following information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om
for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en
for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts and accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 279
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP
.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how
to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online,
visit
www.mopar.com/om
(US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the
following information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
10
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
Keyless Enter ‘n Go
The following regulatory statement applies to
Keyless Enter ‘n Go devices equipped in this
vehicle:
US
Start Button FCC ID: A2C81227100
Key FCC ID: S180227006
RFHM ECU FCC ID: M3N-82135300
These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
MEXICO
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
UConnect
The following regulatory statement applies to
UConnect devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: Y7OVP2REFRESH
IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH
Blind Spot Monitoring Systems
The following regulatory statements apply to Blind
Spot Monitoring System:
MEXICO
IFETEL: RLVCOSR15-0904
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
US
FCC ID OAYSRR3B
These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.
CANADA
ISED Cert Numb: 4135A-SRR3B
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 281
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu
dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement
économique Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Informations sur l’exposition aux rayonnements
radiofréquences:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements définies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm
de distance entre la source de rayonnement et
votre corps.
Medium Range Radar
The following regulatory statements apply to
Medium Range Radar:
MEXICO
IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
US
FCC ID 3887A-MRRE14FCR
These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this equipment
not expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH
may void the FCC authorization to operate this
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense. RF Exposure Information
according 2.1091 / 2.1093 / KDB 447498 / OET
bulletin 65: Radio frequency radiation exposure
Information: This equipment complies with
FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should
be installed and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm between the radiator and your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
CANADA
ISED Cert Numb: 3887A-MRRE14FCR
10
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device must not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu
dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement
économique Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
RF Exposure Information according to RSS-102
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm
de distance entre la source de rayonnement et
votre corps. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place
au meme endroit ou utilise simultanement avec un
autre transmetteur ou antenne.
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
283
INDEX
A
Active Driving Assist.......................................100
Active Speed Limiter........................................ 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)................................................ 87
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............233
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................226
Additives, Fuel ...............................................271
Air Bag ...........................................................179
Air Bag Operation ......................................180
Air Bag Warning Light................................178
Enhanced Accident Response...................220
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................220
If Deployment Occurs................................183
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............184
Maintenance .............................................184
Side Air Bags .............................................180
Transporting Pets......................................190
Air Bag Light ..................................65, 178, 190
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter)...................................... 228, 229
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................229
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 229, 230
Air Conditioner System ..................................229
Air Conditioning Filter .............................43, 230
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 43, 44
Air Filter ........................................................ 228
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 256
Alarm
Security Alarm ......................................20, 68
Alarm System
Security Alarm .............................................20
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 233, 273
Disposal ................................................... 234
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 152
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................68
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 155
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 133
Auto Down Power Windows .............................49
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................49
Automatic Door Locks......................................23
Automatic Headlights.......................................34
Automatic High Beams ....................................34
Automatic Transmission .........................81, 236
Adding Fluid.............................................. 236
Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 236
Fluid Change ............................................ 236
Fluid Level Check ..................................... 236
Fluid Type ........................................ 236, 274
Special Additives ...................................... 236
AUX Cord ..........................................................45
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 158
B
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
S
............53
Battery ................................................... 66, 227
Charging System Light.................................66
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................14
Belts, Seat .................................................... 190
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 158
Body Builders Guide...........................................8
Body Mechanism Lubrication........................ 231
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 253
Brake Assist System ..................................... 153
Brake Control System, Electronic.................. 153
Brake Fluid........................................... 235, 274
Brake System....................................... 235, 269
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 152
Fluid Check............................................... 235
Master Cylinder ........................................ 235
Parking ........................................................78
Warning Light...............................................66
11
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 81
Bulb Replacement.........................................244
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 191, 244
C
Camera, Rear ...................................... 119, 120
Capacities, Fluid ............................................273
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...........................................................122
Oil (Engine)................................................225
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................234
Car Washes ...................................................266
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................192
Cargo Area Cover............................................. 51
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 51
Cargo Light ...................................................... 36
Cellular Phone ...............................................151
Certification Label .........................................123
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped
S
.............. 57
Change Oil Indicator ........................................ 57
Changing A Flat Tire.......................................196
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................250
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) ................................................ 74
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................189
Checks, Safety...............................................189
Child Restraint...............................................185
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 187
Child Seat Installation .............................. 189
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 186
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 187
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 271
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 262
Climate Control ................................................40
Manual ........................................................40
Rear.............................................................43
Cold Weather Operation ..................................76
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 260
Contract, Service .......................................... 277
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 234
Cooling System ............................................. 233
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 233
Coolant Level................................... 233, 234
Cooling Capacity....................................... 273
Disposal Of Used Coolant......................... 234
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 233
Inspection................................................. 234
Points To Remember................................ 234
Pressure Cap............................................ 234
Radiator Cap ............................................ 234
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)..... 233, 273
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 265
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ................. 87, 88
Cruise Light......................................................72
Customer Assistance .................................... 275
Customer Programmable Features ............... 134
Cybersecurity ................................................ 133
D
Dealer Service............................................... 227
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 190
Diagnostic System, Onboard............................74
Dimmer Control Switch ....................................37
Dimmer Switch
Headlight .....................................................34
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ........................... 236
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 226
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 219
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 234
Door Ajar ..........................................................66
Door Ajar Light .................................................66
Door Locks.......................................................21
Automatic ....................................................23
Doors ...............................................................21
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt......................................23
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water.................................................... 131
Drowsy Driver Detection................................ 157
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................153
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 78
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................... 32
Electrical Power Outlets................................... 46
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)........ 88
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................154
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 67
Emergency Braking........................................167
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................218
Jacking ......................................................196
Jump Starting............................................214
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 74
Engine ...........................................................225
Air Cleaner.................................................228
Block Heater ............................................... 77
Break-In Recommendations........................ 78
Checking Oil Level.....................................226
Compartment ............................................225
Compartment Identification ......................225
Coolant (Antifreeze)......................... 233, 273
Cooling ......................................................233
Exhaust Gas Caution.................................192
Fails To Start ............................................... 77
Flooded, Starting......................................... 77
Fuel Requirements.......................... 270, 273
Jump Starting............................................214
Oil .................................................... 228, 273
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 225
Oil Filter .................................................... 228
Oil Selection .................................... 228, 273
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 228
Overheating.............................................. 216
Starting........................................................76
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ......... 220
Entry System, Illuminated ................................38
Ethanol ......................................................... 271
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 192
Exhaust System ................................... 192, 232
Exterior Lights.........................................33, 191
F
Filters
Air Cleaner................................................ 228
Air Conditioning ..................................43, 230
Engine Oil ................................................. 228
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 228
Flashers
Hazard Warning........................................ 193
Turn Signals ............................................. 191
Flat Tire Changing................................ 249, 260
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 249, 260
Flooded Engine Starting...................................77
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 273
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 191
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ........................... 236
Brake........................................................ 235
Cooling System ......................................... 233
Engine Oil ................................................. 226
Fog Lights ........................................................35
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................23
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 164
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 193
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 218
Fuel............................................................... 270
Additives................................................... 271
Clean Air ................................................... 271
Ethanol ..................................................... 271
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 122
Gasoline ................................................... 270
Materials Added ....................................... 271
Methanol .................................................. 271
Octane Rating.................................. 270, 273
Requirements.................................. 270, 273
Tank Capacity ........................................... 273
Fuses ............................................................ 236
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)...................... 122, 123
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 271
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 271
11
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................. 69
Gear Ranges.................................................... 82
Gear Selector Override ..................................217
Glass Cleaning...............................................268
Gross Axle Weight Rating..................... 123, 125
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating................ 123, 124
Guide
Body Builders ................................................ 8
GVWR ............................................................123
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................131
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................193
Head Restraints............................................... 28
Headlights
Automatic.................................................... 34
Cleaning ....................................................266
High Beam ..................................................34
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......... 34
Passing........................................................34
Switch ......................................................... 33
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 33
Heated Seats................................................... 26
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 77
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch.............................................................. 34
Hill Start Assist ..............................................155
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 126
Hood Prop........................................................50
Hood Release ..................................................50
I
Ignition.............................................................16
Switch..........................................................16
Illuminated Entry..............................................38
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ..................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror............................30, 193
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................................55
Display.........................................................56
Display Controls...........................................56
Menu Items .................................................57
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 267
Intelligent Speed Assist ...................................87
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................36
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 266
Interior Lights...................................................36
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................39
Inverter
Power ..........................................................47
iPod/USB/MP3 Control....................................45
J
Jack Location................................................ 196
Jack Operation.............................................. 196
Jacking And Tire Changing............................ 196
Jacking And Tire Changing
S
..................... 196
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions......... 197
Jump Starting................................................ 214
K
Key Fob............................................................13
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............15
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote
Keyless Entry) ..................................................14
Key Fob Programming (Remote
Keyless Entry) ..................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.......................................22
Passive Entry ...............................................22
Keys .................................................................13
Replacement ...............................................15
Sentry (Immobilizer).....................................16
L
Lane Change Assist..........................................35
LaneSense.................................................... 116
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 172
Latches ......................................................... 191
Hood............................................................50
Lead Free Gasoline....................................... 270
Leaks, Fluid................................................... 191
Life Of Tires................................................... 258
Light Bulbs ........................................... 191, 244
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
287
Lights.............................................................191
Air Bag.......................................65, 178, 190
Brake Assist Warning ................................155
Brake Warning ............................................66
Bulb Replacement.....................................244
Collision Warning ................................. 70, 72
Cruise.......................................................... 72
Daytime Running.........................................33
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.................... 33, 34
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator..................................67, 69, 155
Exterior...............................................33, 191
Fuel Cutoff Failure....................................... 72
Hazard Warning Flasher............................193
Headlights................................................... 33
High Beam ..................................................34
Illuminated Entry ......................................... 38
Instrument Cluster ...................................... 67
Interior ........................................................ 36
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........69
Park...................................................... 34, 73
Passing........................................................34
Rear Cargo Door Open Warning Light.......... 68
Seat Belt Reminder..................................... 68
Security Alarm ............................................. 68
Service ......................................................244
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)...............168
Tow Haul ..................................................... 72
TowingHookBreakdown...............................71
Traction Control........................................ 155
Turn Signals .......................................33, 191
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions....67
Loading Vehicle ................................... 123, 124
Capacities................................................. 124
Tires ......................................................... 253
Locks
Automatic Door.....................................21, 23
Low Tire Pressure System............................. 168
Lubrication, Body.......................................... 231
Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 269
M
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 227
Maintenance Schedule................................. 221
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....69
Manual
Service ..................................................... 279
Methanol ...................................................... 271
Mirrors .............................................................30
Electric Remote ...........................................32
Exterior Folding............................................31
Heated.........................................................33
Outside........................................................31
Rearview.............................................30, 193
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 168
Mopar Parts .................................................. 278
MP3 Control.....................................................45
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................33
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................78
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 170
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...................... 270
Oil Change Indicator.........................................57
Reset ...........................................................57
Oil Filter, Change........................................... 228
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 228
Oil Pressure Light.............................................68
Oil, Engine............................................ 228, 273
Capacity.................................................... 273
Checking................................................... 226
Dipstick..................................................... 226
Disposal.................................................... 228
Filter ......................................................... 228
Filter Disposal........................................... 228
Identification Logo .................................... 228
Materials Added To................................... 228
Pressure Warning Light................................68
Recommendation ............................ 228, 273
Synthetic................................................... 228
Viscosity.................................................... 273
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................74
Operating Precautions .....................................74
11
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................279
Outside Rearview Mirrors ......................... 30, 31
Overheating, Engine ......................................216
P
Paint Care......................................................265
Parking Brake.................................................. 78
ParkSense
Front And Rear ..........................................104
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................112
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................104
Passing Light ................................................... 34
Passive Entry ................................................... 22
Pedestrian Warning System ..........................167
Personal Settings ............................................ 59
Pets ...............................................................190
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........253
Power
Inverter........................................................ 47
Mirrors......................................................... 32
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 46
Steering....................................................... 85
Windows...................................................... 49
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................176
Preparation For Jacking....................... 196, 197
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................257
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............234
Radio
Sound Setting........................................... 147
Radio Operation............................................ 151
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................39
Rear Camera........................................ 119, 120
Rear Cross Path............................................ 161
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 104
Rearview Mirror ...............................................30
Recreational Towing ..................................... 130
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 271
Refrigerant.................................................... 230
Release, Hood .................................................50
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 171
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............15
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................19
Remote Starting System ..................................18
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 244
Replacement Keys...........................................15
Replacement Tires........................................ 259
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 278
Restraints, Child ........................................... 185
Restraints, Head..............................................28
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 264
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 190
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 191
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 278
Safety Information, Tire................................. 249
Safety Tips .................................................... 189
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 192
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 221
Seat Belts ............................................ 171, 190
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 175
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 176
Child Restraints ........................................ 185
Energy Management Feature ................... 176
Front Seat...............................171, 172, 174
Inspection................................................. 190
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 174
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 174
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 172
Operating Instructions .............................. 174
Pregnant Women...................................... 176
Rear Seat.................................................. 172
Reminder.................................................. 171
Untwisting Procedure................................ 174
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 267
Seats................................................................23
Adjustment ..................................................23
Heated.........................................................26
Rear Folding ................................................23
Tilting...........................................................23
Security Alarm...........................................20, 68
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 273
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
289
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................. 16
Service Assistance.........................................275
Service Contract ............................................277
Service Manuals............................................279
Settings
Personal....................................................134
Shift Lever Override.......................................217
Shoulder Belts...............................................172
Side Distance Warning ..................................110
Signals, Turn..................................................191
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................263
Snow Tires.....................................................260
Spare Tires .......................................... 260, 261
Speed Limiter, Active....................................... 86
Starting............................................................ 76
Automatic Transmission.............................. 76
Button ......................................................... 16
Cold Weather .............................................. 76
Engine Fails To Start ...................................77
Steering ........................................................... 23
Column Lock ............................................... 23
Power .......................................................... 85
Storage, Vehicle......................................43, 265
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................265
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag.....179
Surround View Camera..................................120
Sway Control, Trailer......................................157
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 9
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................228
T
Telescoping Steering Column ..........................23
Tip Start ...........................................................76
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 253
Tire Markings................................................ 249
Tire Safety Information ................................. 249
Tire Service
Kit ................... 203, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
S
................ 203
Tires...................................191, 256, 260, 264
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 258
Air Pressure .............................................. 256
Chains ...................................................... 263
Changing .................................................. 196
Compact Spare......................................... 260
General Information ........................ 256, 260
High Speed............................................... 257
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 256
Jacking ..................................................... 196
Life Of Tires .............................................. 258
Load Capacity........................................... 253
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..70, 168
Quality Grading......................................... 264
Radial ....................................................... 257
Replacement ............................................ 259
Rotation.................................................... 264
Safety .............................................. 249, 256
Sizes ......................................................... 250
Snow Tires ................................................ 260
Spare Tires ......................................260, 261
Spinning ................................................... 258
Trailer Towing ........................................... 128
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 258
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 269
To Open Hood ..................................................50
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 127
Towing..................................................124, 219
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 219
Guide ........................................................ 126
Recreational ............................................. 130
Weight ...................................................... 126
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 130
Traction......................................................... 131
Traction Control ............................................ 156
Traffic Sign Assist.............................................98
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 157
Trailer Towing................................................ 124
Hitches ..................................................... 126
Minimum Requirements ........................... 127
Tips........................................................... 130
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 127
Wiring ....................................................... 129
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 126
Trailer Weight................................................ 126
11
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290
Transmission
Automatic...........................................81, 236
Fluid ..........................................................274
Maintenance .............................................236
Transmission Fault Warning Light ................... 68
Transporting Pets ..........................................190
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................258
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ....22, 134
Passive Entry Programming......................... 22
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................264
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................270
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................174
USB ................................................................. 45
V
Vehicle Certification Label ............................ 123
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 269
Vehicle Loading ..........................123, 124, 253
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 8
Vehicle Storage.......................................43, 265
Voice Command...............................................29
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................29
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................69
Warning Lights And Messages.........................65
Warranty Information.................................... 278
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 226
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 266
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 131
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 262
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 262
Wind Buffeting .................................................50
Window Fogging...............................................43
Windows ..........................................................49
Power...........................................................49
Windshield Defroster .................................... 190
Windshield Washers ....................... 38, 39, 226
Fluid.............................................................39
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 231
Windshield Wipers ....................................38, 39
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 231
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................39
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................39
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................48
23_VF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If
you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition
23_VM_OM_EN_USC
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
USA
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition
23_VF_OM_EN_USC
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
USA
